Yamaha RX-V540RDS de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V540RDS

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

WA72760

RX-V540RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

RX-V540RDS

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

0100RX-V540_cv_GB.p65 1/20/03, 3:12 PM1

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back

of this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit,

which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to

this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed

to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this

unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

–

Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the

user and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation.

If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal

injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power

cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power

plug from the wall outlet.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC

power plug from the wall outlet.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage

BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power

source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,

even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called

standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to

consume a very small quantity of power.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the

plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and

an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the

instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a

plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live

socket outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED

IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING

CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

apparatus may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug,

proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or

coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured

BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is

marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth

terminal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION

0101RX-V540_Cau_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:36 AM2

English

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES ............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel................................................................. 4

Remote control .......................................................... 6

Front panel display .................................................... 8

ADVANCED OPERATION

SET MENU ........................................................... 40

Set menu list ............................................................ 40

Adjusting the items on the set menu ....................... 40

SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings)

............................................................................. 41

SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) ........ 43

SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL .......................................... 43

SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ................. 43

SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ

(center graphic equalizer) .................................... 44

SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL

(headphone tone control) .................................... 44

INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .. 44

INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ........ 45

OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET ...................................... 45

OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ......... 45

OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE ..................................... 45

OPTION 4 ZONE SET ........................................... 46

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 47

Control area ............................................................. 47

Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 48

Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 48

Controlling other components ................................. 49

SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS ................ 50

Adjusting the volume during playback ................... 50

Using the test tone ................................................... 50

PREPARATION

CONNECTIONS .................................................... 9

Before connecting components ................................. 9

Connecting video components ................................ 10

Connecting audio components ................................ 12

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 13

Connecting an external decoder .............................. 14

Connecting the speakers .......................................... 15

Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18

Turning on the power .............................................. 18

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS ............................. 19

Using the basic menu .............................................. 19

Setting the unit to match your speaker system ........ 21

Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) ............. 21

BASIC OPERATION

PLAYBACK .......................................................... 22

Input modes and indications .................................... 24

Selecting a sound field program .............................. 25

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

............................................................................ 28

Understanding sound fields ..................................... 28

Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 28

CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 29

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 29

CINEMA-DSP Programs ........................................ 29

Sound field effects ................................................... 31

TUNING ................................................................ 32

Presetting stations .................................................... 33

Selecting a preset station ......................................... 35

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 36

Description of RDS data ......................................... 36

Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 36

PTY SEEK function ................................................ 37

EON function .......................................................... 37

SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38

RECORDING ....................................................... 39

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER

EDITING .......................................................... 51

Changing parameter settings ................................... 51

Digital sound field parameter descriptions .............. 52

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 53

GLOSSARY .......................................................... 57

SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 59

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

FEATURES

Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner

◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing)

Other features

◆ 96 kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ Set menu for optimizing this unit for your Audio/

Video system

◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance

adjustment

◆ 6-channel external decoder input

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ S-video signal input/output capability

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Video Conversion (Composite Video ⇔ S Video)

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

◆ Zone B capability

“DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc.

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Main: 80 W + 80 W

Center: 80 W

Rear: 80 W + 80 W

Rear center: 80 W

[Other models]

Main: 70 W + 70 W

Center: 70 W

Rear: 70 W + 70 W

Rear center: 70 W

Multi-mode digital sound field processing

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6

Decoder

◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP

technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or

DTS

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP

■ About this manual

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases

when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is

given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of

the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM2

English

INTRODUCTION

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the

+ and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings

(+ and –) inside the battery compartment.

1 Press the part marked with a and slide off

the battery compartment cover.

2 Insert the four batteries supplied (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings on

the inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into

place.

■ Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in

the operating range of the remote control, that the

indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline

and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging

carefully as these different types of batteries may have

the same shape and color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them

immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or

letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the

battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

AM loop antenna

(Europe, U.K., Australia and

Singapore models)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea and General models)

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Remote control

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model)

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUTTV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns the unit on, or sets it in standby mode. When you

turn the unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4

to 5-second delay before it can reproduce sound.

Standby mode

In this mode, the unit uses a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote

control.

2 INPUT MODE

Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,

DTS, ANALOG) received when one component is

connected to two or more input jacks. You cannot set

priority for an audio source if you have selected 6CH

INPUT as the input source.

3 INPUT

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

4 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks. This selection takes priority over sources selected

with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote

control).

5 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

6 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of the

unit.

7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.

8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the

colon (:) turns on or off).

This button is also used to exchange the assignment of

two preset stations with each other.

9 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores the current station in memory.

q VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

MODE START

PTY SEEK

EDIT

RDS MODE/FREQ

EON

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

1 32 4 8756 q9

a s fd

MODE START

RDS MODE/FREQ

PTY SEEK

EON

w r y o

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM4

English

INTRODUCTION

w SILENT (PHONES jack)

Allows you to enjoy DSP effects when listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones to the

headphone jack, no signals are output to the speakers.

e SPEAKERS A/B

Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or

B terminals on or off.

r STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When you select STEREO, the unit mixes

down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE

channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without

effects, to the main left and right speakers.

t PROGRAM l / h

Select the DSP program.

y A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset station groups A to E when the unit is in

tuner mode.

Selects the set menu mode when the unit is not in tuner

mode.

u PRESET/TUNING l / h

Select preset station numbers 1 to 8 when a colon (:) is

displayed in the front panel display.

Select the tuning frequency when a colon (:) is not

displayed when the unit is in tuner mode.

SET MENU –/+

Adjust settings on the set menu when the unit is not in

tuner mode.

i CONTROL

Switches between Bass (low-frequency response) control

mode and Treble (high-frequency response) control mode.

o BASS/TREBLE –/+

Increase or decrease low/high-frequency response when

the unit is in Bass/Treble control mode. The sound

changes 2dB each time you press one of these buttons.

Control range: –10 to +10dB

p VIDEO AUX jacks

Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable

external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source

to V-AUX to select source signals from these jacks.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

a RDS MODE/FREQ

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS

station, to cycle the display mode among PS mode,

PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers

those RDS data service) and/or frequency display

mode in turn.

s PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK

mode.

d PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after

the desired program type has been selected in the PTY

SEEK mode.

f EON

Press this button to select a radio program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in

automatically.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM5

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

Remote control

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 CODE SET

Used to set up manufacturer codes (see page 48).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and set the remote control to

operate the selected source component.

4 DSP program

Select DSP programs when the remote control is in AMP

mode. Press one of these buttons repeatedly to select a

DSP program within a program group.

5 LEVEL

Selects the effect speaker channel to adjust.

6 Multi control section

Used to change and implement settings.

7 TEST

Outputs a test tone for use when adjusting the speaker

levels.

8 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

9 STANDBY

Sets this unit in standby mode.

0 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of the unit.

q SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

w 6CH INPUT

Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT

jacks.

e AMP

Switches the function of the same controls between AMP

and the component selected using the input selector

buttons.

r ★/★★

Sets the remote control to operate other components (not

necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this

unit’s input source.

t VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the remote control controls and

their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected

before starting operation.

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM6

English

INTRODUCTION

Approximately 6 m (20 feet)

■ Using the remote control

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,

stove or bath;

– dusty places; or

– in places subject to extremely low temperatures.

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

30° 30°

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

y MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output

to the previous volume level.

u 6.1/5.1

Switches the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder on or

off.

i STEREO/EFFECT

Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect

reproduction. When you select STEREO the unit mixes

down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE

channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effect

sounds, to the main left and right speakers.

o NIGHT

Sets the unit in night listening mode.

p SET MENU

Selects the set menu mode.

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM7

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

DISCRETEMATRIX

DIGITAL

PCM

SILENT

DSP

HiFi

NIGHT

VIRTUAL

A B

AUTO

STEREO

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

MEMORYTUNED

L C R

RLLFE RC RR

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

CTRTPTYPS

HOLDPTYEON

90qw yer uiop

1 Processor indicators

The indicators for the various decoders light up when the

decoders are in use.

2 VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP.

3 Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected to the

headphone jack.

4 Input source indicator

Highlights the current input source with a cursor.

5 Sound field indicator

Displays the sound field management the unit is using

when you listen to a DSP sound field program.

6 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

7 MUTE indicator

Flashes while the MUTE function is on.

8 VOLUME level indicator

Indicates the volume level.

9 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

0 SILENT indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and the digital

sound field processor is on.

q SP A B indicator

Lights up to indicate which set of main speakers is

selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of

speakers are selected.

w NIGHT indicator

Lights up when the unit is set to night listening mode.

e HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a Hi-Fi DSP sound field

program.

r CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

t Multi-information display

Shows the current DSP program name and other

information when you are adjusting or changing settings.

y STEREO indicator

Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal from

a FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

u TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned to a radio station.

i MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored in memory.

o SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

p LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.

a Input channel indicator

The indicators for the appropriate sound channels light up

when a digital signal from a source is played back.

s RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers

the EON data service is being received.

PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for

stations in the PTY SEEK mode.

Front panel display

(U.K. and Europe models only)

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:37 AM8

English

PREPARATION

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

CAUTION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the

mains power until all connections between the

components have been completed.

• Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to

say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to

“–”. Some components require different connection

methods and have different jack names. Refer to the

operation instructions for each component you wish to

connect to this unit.

• After you have completed all connections, check them

again to make sure they are correct.

• The jack names correspond to the names on the input

selector.

■ Connecting to digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of

digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.

You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital

and DTS bitstreams. Use digital connections if you wish

to enjoy the multi-channel sound track of DVD material,

etc. with DSP effects. All digital input jacks are

acceptable for 96 kHz sampling digital signals.

Note

• The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.

If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this

standard this unit may not function properly.

AC OUTLETS

(page 18)

6CH INPUT jacks

(page 14)

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

(page 12)

DIGITAL INPUT jacks

(pages 9 – 12)

Antenna input terminals

(page 13)

Speaker terminals

(page 17)

Video component jacks

(pages 10 – 11)

Audio component jacks

(page 12)

SUBWOOFER OUTPUT

jack (page 17)

This jack is reserved for factory use.

Do not connect any equipment to this jack.

MAIN

CENTER

R L

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT OUTPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

SPEAKERS

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

R L

DVD

B Y

COMPORNENT VIDEO

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM9

Connecting video components

Refer to the connection examples on the next page.

■ Types of video jacks

1 VIDEO jack

Conventional composite video signal.

2 S VIDEO jack

Transmits color and luminance separately and

achieves high-quality color reproduction.

3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit color difference (P

B, PR) and luminance

separately and provide the best quality picture.

Use the commercially available cable type specified for

connecting each jack.

• You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A

and B jacks to suit your components by using “INPUT 1 I/O

ASSIGNMENT” on the set menu.

• Signals received through the S VIDEO input jacks can be

converted to composite signals in this unit and output through

its VIDEO MONITOR OUT as well.

• (With the exception of China and General models) Signals

received through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output

through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting “V

CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu to

ON.

• When the unit receives signals through both S VIDEO and

VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have

priority.

■ Connecting a video monitor

Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.

Note

• If you connect this unit with a source component using

Component video jacks, you also need to connect your video

monitor using Component video jacks.

■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable

Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on

your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and

connect the video signal output jack on the component to

the VIDEO jack on this unit.

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a video component

which does not have optical digital output jack. However,

multi-channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio

signals input from the AUDIO jacks.

■ Connecting a recording component

Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video

component to the AUDIO OUT jacks on this unit. Then

connect the video signal input jack on the video

component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for

picture recording.

Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component

to the AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Then connect the

video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO

IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording

component.

Note

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

Only when “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET”

is set to ON on the set menu.

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Signal flow inside this unit

Input

CONNECTIONS

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEOVIDEO

1 2 3

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM10

English

PREPARATION

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT OUTPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

AUDIO

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

SUB

WOOFER

VIDEOAUDIO

VCR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

S VIDEOVIDEO

DVD

B Y

COMPORNENT VIDEO

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

AUDIO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

LR LR

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

L R

VIDEO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

indicates video signal direction

indicates optical cables

indicates right analog cables

indicates left analog cables

indicates audio signal direction

Video monitorVCR

DVD player

TV/digital TV/

cable TV

CONNECTIONS

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM11

Connecting audio components

■ Connecting a CD player

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player

to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack on this unit.

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD player which does

not have coaxial digital output jack.

■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD

recorder

Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/

CD-R jack on this unit for digital recording.

Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD

recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/

CD-R jack on this unit to play a source from your

recording component.

indicates signal direction

CD player

• Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD recorder or MD

recorder which does not have optical digital input or output

jack.

Notes

• Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,

keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is

off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.

• The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks

are independent. The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack only outputs

digital signals, while the OUT (REC) jacks output analog

signals only.

indicates coaxial cables

indicates optical cables

CD recorder or

MD recorder

CONNECTIONS

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT OUTPUT

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

SUB

WOOFER

VIDEOAUDIO

VCR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

S VIDEOVIDEO

DVD

COMPORNENT VID

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

AUDIO

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

MAIN

DIGITAL

INPUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

COAXIAL

OUTPUT

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM12

English

PREPARATION

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and

GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

Notes

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer

reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor

reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the

quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA

dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.

FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General

models only)

Because the inter-station frequency

spacing differs in different areas, set the

FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on

the rear panel) according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

North, Central and South America:

100 kHz/10 kHz

Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect the

AC power plug of this unit from the AC

outlet.

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM

antenna

(included)

AM loop antenna

(included)

Connecting the antennas

Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

Insert the cable wire into the

slot, and clamp it with pliers.

Snap the cover into

place.

Unit:

mm (inch)

Lead wire

Clamp with

pliers.

Clamp

with

pliers.

Insert the wire

into the slot.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only)

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength.

Connect each antenna correctly to the designated

terminals.

CONNECTIONS

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM/AM

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM13

Connecting an external decoder

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN

left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a

component equipped with a multi-channel decoder and 6

channel output jacks such as a DVD/SACD player.

Note

• When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, the unit

automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and

you cannot use DSP programs.

CONNECTIONS

DVD/SACD player

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

VCR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

S VIDEOVIDEO

6CH INPUT

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

MAIN

L R

SUBWOOFER MAIN

CENTER SURROUND

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM14

English

PREPARATION

Connecting the speakers

■ Speakers

This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-

field quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and

right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center

speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different

brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your

system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types

of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you

use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers

with the same tonal quality.

The main speakers are used for the main source sound

plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers

from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are

used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is

for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center

speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and

provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions.

The main speakers should be high-performance models

and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the

maximum output of your audio system. The other

speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For

precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the

models of equivalent performance with the main

speakers.

Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field

It is also possible to further expand your system with the

addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is

effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from

any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when

playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is

ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.

Main

speaker (L)

1.8 m (6 feet)

Rear speaker (L)

Rear center

speaker

Rear speaker (R)

Subwoofer

Main speaker (R)

Center speaker

CONNECTIONS

■ Speaker placement

Refer to the following diagram when you place the

speakers.

Main speakers

Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance

from the ideal listening position. The distance between

each speaker and each side of the video monitor should

also be the same.

Center speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front

face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to

the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the

monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.

Rear speakers

Place these speakers behind your listening position,

facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 feet) above the

floor.

Rear center speaker

Place the rear center speaker in the center between the

rear left and right speakers at the same height from the

floor as the rear speakers.

Subwoofer

The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because

low bass sounds are not highly directional. However, it is

better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers.

Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce

wall reflections.

Note

• If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or

rear center), change the settings of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER

SET” items at the set menu to direct signals to other terminals

you have connected speakers to.

CAUTION

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers

still create interference with the monitor, place the

speakers away from the monitor.

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM15

10 mm (3/8”)

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

CONNECTIONS

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

WARNING

Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may

damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the

way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in

standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system.

■ Connections

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) in accordance with the markers on

this unit, the speakers, and the speaker cables. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers,

and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass.

CAUTION

• Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/

or the speakers.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of

insulation from each of the speaker cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable

together to prevent short circuits.

3 Unscrew the knob.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

• You can also use banana plug connectors. First, tighten the

knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of

the corresponding terminal.

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

Switch

position

Left

Right

Speaker

Main

Center,

Rear Center,

Rear

Main*

Center,

Rear Center,

Rear

Impedance level

If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 4 Ω/8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of

each speaker must be 8 Ω/16 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

* [Canada model only]

When the switch is set to right, you cannot use “A+B”.

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

switch

(General model)

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM16

English

PREPARATION

Subwoofer

system

Rear center

speakerMain B speaker

Center

speaker

Right

Rear speaker

SUBWOOFER jack

When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. This unit will direct low bass signals distributed from the

main, center and/or rear channels to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance

with your SPEAKER SET selections.

Notes

• The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.

• If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of “SOUND 1

SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu to MAIN.

• Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control

(see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on page 50).

Right Left

Main A speaker

Right Left Left

MAIN SPEAKERS terminals

You can connect up to two speaker systems to these

terminals. When using only one speaker system, connect

it to either of the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals.

REAR SPEAKERS terminals

A rear speaker system can be connected to these

terminals.

CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals

A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals.

CONNECTIONS

The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening

room.

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

6CH INPUT

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

VIDEOAUDIOAUDIO

MD/CD-R

DVD

D-TV/CBL

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

VCR

OUT

MONITOR OUT

DVD

D-TV

/CBL

/CD-R

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

SURROUND

MAIN

S VIDEOVIDEO

TUNER

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

GND

ANT

DVD

B Y

COMPORNENT VIDEO

D-TV

/CBL

MONITOR

OUT

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

MAIN

CENTER

R L

SPEAKERS

REAR

(SURROUND)

REAR

CENTER

R L

432

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM17

Connecting the power supply

cords

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug in this unit to a wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)

U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and

General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS

U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS

is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM

POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply

power to any source component connected to this unit

whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power

(total power consumption of components) that can be

connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the

area which it was purchasing.

China and General models......................................... 50 W

Other models ......................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(China and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/

220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

Turning on the power

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

The level of the main volume, and then the current

DSP program name appear on the front panel

display.

Remote control

Front panel

(General model)

CONNECTIONS

REAR

CENTER

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

4ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

6ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

SET BEFORE POWER ON

MAIN

CENTER

REAR CENTER

REAR

A OR B :

A+B :

8ΩMIN.

16ΩMIN.

8ΩMIN.

/SPEAKER

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:38 AM18

English

PREPARATION

Using the basic menu

Use the remote control to make adjustments.

• Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select

the main speakers you want to use.

• Make sure you disconnect headphones from this unit.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU.

“BASIC MENU” appears on the front panel display,

as shown here.

If the front panel display

changes to show anything

other than “BASIC MENU”,

press u until it displays

“BASIC MENU”.

3 Press j / i to enter into the BASIC menu.

The front panel display changes as shown here:

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

The “BASIC” menu allows you to set some of the basic “SOUND” menu parameters with a minimum of effort. If you

wish to configure the unit more precisely to suit your listening environment, use the more detailed parameters from the

“SOUND” menu instead of those under the “BASIC” menu (See page 41). Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu

will reset all parameters in the “SOUND” menu.

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

4,7

3,5

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

4 Press u / d to change the display to the

setting you want to alter.

SETUP

Changes the speaker and amplifier settings to suit the

size of the room you are using. Refer to “Setting the

unit to match your speaker system” for more

information.

SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output levels of the speakers.

Refer to “Setting speaker output levels” for more

information.

5 Press j / i to enter the desired setting mode.

6 Change the unit settings to suit your

listening environment. When you have

finished, the unit will automatically return to

the basic menu.

7 Press u / d to exit from the set menu.

The front panel display changes in the following

order:

BASIC MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

1 SETUP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

↑

BASIC

↓↑

SOUND

↓↑

INPUT

↓↑

OPTION

↓

Exit

AMP

0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM19

SET MENU

BASIC SOUND INPUT OPTION

1 SETUP

Press j / i to alter the settings for each

parameter. Use d to move to the next

setting.

2 SP LEVEL

Press j / i to adjust the balance

between each speaker and the left main

speaker. Use d to move to the next

setting.

1 ROOM

Choose from S/M/L.

2 SUBWOOFER

Choose either of YES/NONE.

3 SPEAKERS

Choose from 2/3/4/5/6 spk.

4 SET/CANCEL

Choose either of SET/CANCEL.

5 CHECK OK:

Choose either of YES/NO.

1 L-R

Adjust the balance between the main

left and right speakers.

2 C

Adjust the balance between the main

left and center speakers.

3 RL

Adjust the balance between the main

left and rear left speakers.

4 RC

Adjust the balance between the rear

left and rear center speakers.

5 RR

Adjust the balance between the rear

left and rear right speakers.

SET

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

YES

CANCEL

• After altering the “1 SETUP” parameters, readjust the output levels of the speakers at “2 SP LEVEL”.

• See pages 40 – 46 for a detailed explanation of the “SOUND”, “INPUT” and “OPTION” menus.

6 SWFR

Adjust the balance between the main

left speaker and the subwoofer.

0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM20

English

PREPARATION

Setting the unit to match your

speaker system

Follow the instructions below to set the amplifier output

to match the size of your room and speakers. Press u / d

to cycle through parameters 1 through 4, and j / i to alter

the parameter setting.

Factory default settings are highlighted.

1 ROOM

Settings: S, M, L

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S: 16ft. x 3ft., 200sq.ft. (4.8 x 4m, 20m

)

M: 20ft. x 16ft., 300sq.ft. (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m

)

L: 26ft. x 19ft., 450sq.ft. (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m

)

[Other models]

S: 3.6m x 2.8m, 10m

M: 4.8m x 4.0m, 20m

L: 6.3m x 5.0m, 30m

2 SUBWOOFER

Settings: YES, NONE

Select YES if you have a subwoofer in your system,

or NONE if you do not.

3 SPEAKERS

Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (spk)

Select the number of speakers you wish to use in your

speaker configuration. This number does not include

your subwoofer.

BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS

4 SET or CANCEL

Select SET to confirm the changes you made to the

above three settings. The unit will output a test tone to

the speakers (see

). Alternatively, select CANCEL

to exit this menu without altering any of the unit

settings.

5 Use the test tone to check the speaker levels.

When you select SET in

, the display changes to

“CHECK: TestTone”, and the unit outputs a test tone

to each of the speakers in turn. When the test tone

begins, the display changes to “CHECK OK: YES”.

If the volume of the test tone varies between speakers,

press j / i to change the display to “NO”. The unit

will automatically enter the “2 SP LEVEL” mode.

If the test tone is output at the same volume from all

of the speakers, select “CHECK OK: YES”. The unit

will exit from the SETUP menu.

Notes

• The unit cycles the test tone around each of the speakers in

turn twice.

• The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone

flashes on the front panel display.

Setting speaker output levels

(SP LEVEL)

Use this menu to compare and adjust the test tone output

from each speaker to the output from the left main (or left

rear) speaker so that the volume level for all speakers is

identical. Press u / d to select a speaker, then adjust the

balance using j / i.

Note

• The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker and

the left main (or left rear) speaker in turn. The indicator of the

speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front

panel display.

1 L-R

Adjusts the balance between the main left and right

speakers.

2 C

Adjusts the balance between the main left and center

speakers.

3 RL

Adjusts the balance between the main left and rear

left speakers.

4 RC

Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear

center speakers.

5 RR

Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear

right speakers.

6 SWFR

Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and

the subwoofer.

Setting

2spk

3spk

4spk

5spk

6spk

Display

L R

L C R

L R

RL RR

L C R

RL RR

L C R

RL RC RR

Speaker

Main L/Main R

Main L/Center/Main R

Main L/Main R/Rear L/

Rear R

Main L/Center/Main R/

Rear L/Rear R

Main L/Center/Main R/

Rear L/Rear Center/Rear R

0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM21

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B

to select the main

speakers you want to use.

If you are using two sets of

main speakers, press both A

and B.

4 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of

the input selector buttons on the remote

control) to select the input source.

The selected input source name and input mode

appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.

To select the audio source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks

• Select the input to which the video source component is

connected before selecting an audio source.

Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the

front panel display.

Note

• If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other

source can be played. To select another input source, first

press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” disappears from the

front panel display.

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Remote control

Front panel

Selected input source

6CH INPUT

Remote control

Front panel

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

SPEAKERS

INPUT

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

VOLUME

L R

DVD AUTO

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM22

English

BASIC

OPERATION

■ BGV (background video) function

The BGV function allows you to view images from a

video source together with sounds from an audio source.

For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music

while watching beautiful scenery from a video source on

the video monitor.

Select a source from the video group, then select a source

from the audio group using the input selector buttons on

the remote control.

■ To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the

remote control.

To resume audio output, press

MUTE again.

• You can change the amount by which the unit reduces the

volume in “OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE” in the set menu.

• You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc.

• During muting, the MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel

display.

■ Night listening mode

This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the

volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low

volumes or at night.

Press NIGHT on the

remote control.

Press NIGHT once more to

return to normal reproduction.

Note

• Setting the unit in standby mode cancels night listening mode.

• You can use night listening mode with any of the sound field

programs.

• The NIGHT indicator on the front panel display lights when

the unit is in night listening mode.

• Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on

the input source and surround sound settings you use.

■ When you have finished using this unit

Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the

remote control) to set this unit in standby

mode.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the

component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired level.

The volume level is displayed digitally.

Example: –70 dB

Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to

0 dB (maximum)

The volume level indicator also shows the current

volume level as a bar graph.

If desired, use CONTROL and BASS/TREBLE –/+.

These controls only effect the sound from the main

speakers.

Notes

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the

center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left

and right speakers.

• If you have connected a recording component to the VCR

OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or

low volume during playback from other components, try

turning the recording component on.

7 Select a DSP program if desired.

Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on

the remote control) to select a DSP program. See

pages 28 – 30 for details about DSP programs.

When using the remote control, press AMP before

selecting a DSP program.

VOLUME

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel Remote control

STANDBY

/ON

STANDBY

Front panel

Remote control

MUTE

VOLUME

–

PROGRAM

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

PLAYBACK

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

NIGHT

Front panel

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM23

Input modes and indications

This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks. You

can select the type of input signals you wish to use.

Each time you turn on the unit power, the input mode is

set to the “INPUT 2 INPUT MODE” setting defined in

the set menu.

Press INPUT MODE repeatedly until the

desired input mode is shown on the front

panel display.

AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected

automatically as follows:

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals

encoded with DTS are selected, even if the

unit is receiving another signal

simultaneously.

ANALOG: In this mode, only analog input signals are

selected, even the unit is receiving digital

signals at the same time.

Notes

• When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines

the type of signal. If it detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,

the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting.

• When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on

some LD or DVD players, there is a delay in sound output for

a moment when playback resumes after a search, because the

unit must select the digital signal again.

• When playing a LD source that has not been digitally

recorded, the unit may not output any sound for some LD

players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG.

Front panel

Input mode

■ Notes on digital signals

The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96 kHz

sampling digital signals. Note the following when a

digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48

kHz is input to this unit:

• You cannot use any DSP programs.

• The unit will output sound as 2-channel stereo from the

main left and right speakers only. Therefore, you

cannot adjust the level of the effect speakers while

listening to such a source.

■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs

• If the digital output data of the player has been

processed in any way, the unit may not be able to

perform DTS decoding even if there is a digital

connection between this unit and the player.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set

the input mode to ANALOG, the unit may reproduce

the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case,

connect the source to a digital input jack on this unit

and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.

• If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, the unit

does not output any sound.

• If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with

the input mode set to AUTO;

– The unit automatically switches to the DTS-

decoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up)

after detecting the DTS signal. When playback of

the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator

may flash. While this indicator is flashing, the unit

can only reproduce DTS source. If you want to play

a normal PCM source immediately, change the input

mode back to AUTO.

– When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search

or skip operation is performed during playback of a

DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this

state continues for longer than 30 seconds, the unit

will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding”

mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t”

indicator will turn off.

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

VOLUME

L R

DVD AUTO

INPUT MODE

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM24

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Selecting a sound field program

You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a

DSP program. For details about each program, see pages

28 – 30.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press one of the numeric buttons on the

remote control to select the desired

program.

The name of the selected program appears on the

front panel display.

AMP

3 After selecting the desired program, press

the same button repeatedly to cycle through

sub-programs if available.

Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 2

repeatedly switches the sub-program

between “Adventure” and

“General”.

Notes

• There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this

unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal

format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input

signal formats.

• You cannot use the digital sound field processor with a source

connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit or when the

unit is reproducing a digital source with a sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

• The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.

Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the

effect created by the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically

selects the last DSP program used with that source.

• When you set this unit in standby mode, it stores the current

source and DSP program in memory and automatically selects

them when you turn on the power again.

• If the unit receives a Dolby Digital or DTS signal when the

input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9)

automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program.

• When the unit is reproducing a monaural source with PRO

LOGIC or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie,

no sound is output from the main and rear speakers. Sound can

only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on

the set menu is set to NON, the center channel sound is output

from the main speakers.)

• You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM

l / h on the front panel.

• Select a program based on your listening preference. Program

names are just for reference.

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

PROGRAM l / h

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR 1

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

2,3

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

Adventure

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

General

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM25

The display cycles as follows each time you press q/

DTS SUR :

PRO LOGIC→PRO LOGIC Enhanced→PRO LOGIC II

Movie→PRO LOGIC II Music→Neo:6 Cinema→Neo:6

Music→PRO LOGIC→....

• You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Enhanced, PRO

LOGIC II Movie, PRO LOGIC II Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and

Neo:6 Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front

panel repeatedly.

■ Playing Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

material

Press 6.1/5.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES

decoder to listen to Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES

material with a rear center speaker.

Press 6.1/5.1 to choose the playback mode. (The modes

you can select vary depending on the format of the

material you are playing.)

AUTO: This mode automatically switches to Dolby

Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES

Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the

input source that the unit detects. The rear

center speaker does not output sound for 5.1

channel sources.

Discrete 6.1: This mode can only be selected only when

the unit detects a source encoded with the

DTS ES Discrete format. (The DISCRETE

indicator lights up.)

Matrix 6.1: This mode allows for 6-channel playback of

the input source through the Matrix 6.1

decoder. (Either

or MATRIX

indicator lights up.)

OFF: The rear center speaker does not output

sound in this mode.

Notes

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

that this unit can automatically detect. Select “Matrix 6.1” to

play these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel sound.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press 6.1/5.1

in the following cases:

1 When “1C REAR LR” is set to NON.

2 When effects are turned off.

3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is

being played.

4 When the unit is reproducing a Dolby Digital KARAOKE

source.

5 When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

• The input mode resets to AUTO when you turn the unit power

off.

■ Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or

Neo:6

You can listen to 2-channel sources decoded into five or

six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO

LOGIC II or Neo:6 in program No. 9.

1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback

on the source component.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press q/DTS SUR.

AMP

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

PROGRAM l / h

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

STEREO

EFFECT

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

6.1/5.1

+10

(Example)

PLAYBACK

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

MATRIX

VOLUME

L C R

RLLFE RR

Matrix 6.1

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

VOLUME

L R

PRO LOGIC

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM26

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Notes

• If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the

center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker.

• If you turn off the sound effects while the unit is reproducing

sound from a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the dynamic range

of the signal is automatically compressed and the unit will

output mix the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels

and output them from the main speakers.

• The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the

sound effects or if you set “SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic

range)” on the set menu to MIN. In this case turn on the sound

effect.

• During stereo reproduction, you can display information such

as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input

from the components connected to this unit.

(While playing a source)

1 Press AMP.

2 Press d to display the information about the

input signal.

(Format): The display shows the signal format. When the

unit cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in: The display shows the number of input signal

source channels, as follows: For multi-channel

soundtrack such as front 3 channels, rear 2

channels and LFE, the display shows “3/2/

LFE”.

For bilingual broadcasts where the signal is

split into 2 channels, the display shows “1+1”.

For signals with more than 3 channels the

display shows “MLT”.

fs: The display shows the sampling frequency.

When the unit is unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” shows in the front panel

display.

rate: The display shows the bit rate. When the unit is

unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” shows

in the front panel display.

flg: The display shows the flag - data encoded in a

DTS or Dolby Digital signal that causes this

unit to automatically switch to the appropriate

decoder for playback.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP

programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers

to reproduce a natural sound field.

You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C

REAR LR” in the set menu to NON. Sound field

processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP

automatically.

Note

• This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if

“1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases:

– when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL, Pro Logic, Pro

Logic II, or DTS program is selected;

– when the sound effect is turned off;

– when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;

– when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater

than 48 kHz is input to this unit;

– when using the test tone; or

– when connecting the headphones.

■ SILENT CINEMA DSP

You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you

could expect from actual speakers through headphones,

with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT

CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the

PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is

on. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. (When sound effects are off, the unit reproduces

the source in normal stereo.)

Notes

• This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or

the unit is receiving a digital signal with a sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

• The sound from the LFE channel will be mixed and output

from the headphones.

■ Normal stereo reproduction

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound

effect for normal stereo reproduction.

Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound

effect back on.

STEREO

EFFECT

ENTER

Front panel

Remote control

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

EFFECT

STEREO

PLAYBACK

0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:39 AM27

DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)

Understanding sound fields

A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a

particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear

early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound

produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and

other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives

each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.

YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to

measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music

venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the

direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then

we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this

unit.

■ Recreating a sound field

Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your

listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound

field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.

The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the

virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.

Hi-Fi DSP programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.

No.

Program

CONCERT HALL

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK CONCERT

ENTERTAINMENT/

Disco

ENTERTAINMENT/

6ch Stereo

Features

A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions

emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual

seat is near the center, close to the stage.

This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that

seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.

The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s

“hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.

This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The

sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate”

sound.

Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for

background music at parties, etc.

0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM28

English

BASIC

OPERATION

CINEMA-DSP

Sound design of CINEMA-DSP

Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread

even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with

the images on the screen.

CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP

integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field

programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In

CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and

Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,

and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.

When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the

most suitable sound field program for that signal.

L SURROUND SOUND FIELD

R SURROUND SOUND FIELD

PRESENCE SOUND FIELD

DIALOG

EFFECT MUSIC

In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby

Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic II decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder

for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder for adding a rear center channel. You can select

CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.

CINEMA-DSP Programs

The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in

mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you

feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.

■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6

No.

Program

ENTERTAINMENT/

Game

MUSIC VIDEO

TV THEATER/

Mono Movie

TV THEATER/Variety/

Sports

Features

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an

actual jazz or rock concert.

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound

field.

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound

environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV

programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM29

■ For movie programs

No.

Features

This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It

precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field

incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround,

Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of

science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the

silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest

movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as

possible.

This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,

and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is

relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the

echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

The built-in decoder reproduces source sounds and sound-effects precisely.

No DSP effect is applied in this program.

This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film

theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital

sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orienta-

tion.

The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from

the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

Spectacle

Sci-Fi

Adventure

General

Program

Straight Decode

Enhanced Mode

CINEMA-DSP

Straight Decode

This unit is equipped with various precise decoders;

• Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound

• Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel

• Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources

Select any of the Straight Decode modes in Program 9 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced”) to use any of these

decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and

the DSP indicator turns off.

Note

• When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the main

and rear speakers output effect sounds.

0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM30

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Sound field effects

The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without

using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound

localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality

sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby

Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.

■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect

These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing

on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,

left surround, and right surround channels. This

processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense

sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-

or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the

clear separation of all channels.

■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES + DSP sound field effect

These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear

center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel.

■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect

Most movie material has 4-channel (left, center, right, and

surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround

matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks.

These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic

decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed

to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of

sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding

processes.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6

This unit comes with Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6 decoders which decode 2-channel Dolby Surround data into

five or six full range channels. Both decoders have two modes, MOVIE/CINEMA for movies, and MUSIC for 2-

channel sources.

Surround DSP

sound field

Right surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

Left surround DSP

sound field

Presence DSP

sound field

CINEMA-DSP

0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM31

TUNING

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency.

When the unit is tuned in to a station, the “TUNED”

indicator lights up and the frequency of the station

received is shown on the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you are trying to select is

weak, you must tune in to it manually.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 described in

“Automatic tuning” at left.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

until the “AUTO” indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING

l / h to tune in to the

desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

Note

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change

the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

There are 2 methods of tuning; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate the INPUT selector (or press TUNER

on the remote control) to select TUNER as

the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,

press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.

Lights up

Front panel Remote control

Disappears

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

233

INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

VCR2/DVR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

FM/AM

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

TUNED

A AM 1530 kHz

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM32

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Presetting stations

■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM

stations)

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables the unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those

stations in order. You can then recall any preset station

easily by selecting the preset number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

until the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for at least 3 seconds.

The preset number and the “MEMORY” and

“AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds,

automatic preset tuning starts, beginning at the

frequency currently displayed and moving toward the

higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

AUTO

Lights up

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually

in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure

described in “Manually presetting stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit

will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode,

the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or

the power supply is temporarily cut due to power

failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one

week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store

the stations again.

TUNING

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

1 32

FM/AM

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

TUNING MODE

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

AUTO

MEMORY

A1:FM 89.9 MHz

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM33

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset group and number you

have selected.

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Notes

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

■ Manually presetting stations

You can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)

manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 32 for tuning instructions.

When tuned to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about

5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) is

showing on the front panel display.

Flashes

TUNING

Preset group

Preset number

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

2,5

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

A AM 1440 kHz

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

A/B/C/D/E

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

C:AM 1440 kHz

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

MAN`L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM34

English

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Exchanging preset stations

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.

The example below describes the procedure for

exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting a preset station” at left.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

at least 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting a preset station

You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote

control) to select the preset station group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u /

d on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band and

frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

Shows the exchange of stations has been

completed.

Front panel

Remote control

Front panel

Remote control

TUNING

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

TUNED

C3:AM 1440 kHz

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

2,4

1,31,3

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORYTUNED

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

MEMORY

EDIT E1-A5

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM35

Description of RDS data

This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data

when tuned to stations broadcasting RDS.

■ PS (Program Service name) mode:

The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.

■ PTY (Program Type) mode:

There are 15 program types used to classify RDS stations.

■ RT (Radio Text) mode:

Information about the program (such as the title of the

song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being

received is displayed using a maximum of 64

alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol.

Any other characters used in RT data are displayed with

under-bars.

■ CT (Clock Time) mode:

The current time is displayed and updated every minute.

“CT WAIT” may appear if the data is accidentally cut off.

■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks):

Refer to the following page.

Changing the RDS mode

This unit provides four modes for displaying RDS data.

The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that

correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station

light up on the front panel display when an RDS station is

being received. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to

cycle the display through the RDS data offered by the

transmitting station in the order shown below.

Notes

• Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ when an RDS station is

being received until one or more RDS mode indicators light

up on the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if

you press this button prior to this. This is because this unit has

not finished receiving all of the RDS data on the station.

• RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.

• This unit cannot utilize the RDS data service if the signal

received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode

requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT

mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS,

PTY, etc.) are displayed.

• Sometimes, RDS data cannot be received in poor reception

conditions. If this is the case, press TUNING MODE so that

the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display.

Although this will change the reception mode to monoaural,

RDS data may be displayed when you change the display to

RDS mode.

• If the signal strength is weakened by external interference

during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service

may cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front

panel display.

PS mode

RDS mode

OFF

CT mode

RT mode

PTY mode

NEWS

AFFAIRS

INFO

SPORT

EDUCATE

DRAMA

CULTURE

SCIENCE

VARIED

POP M

ROCK M

M.O.R. M

LIGHT M

CLASSICS

OTHER M

News

Current affairs

General information

Sports

Education

Drama

Culture

Science

Light entertainment

Pops

Rock

Middle-of-the-road music

(easy-listening)

Light classics

Serious classics

Other music

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries.

RDS data contains a variety of information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text),

CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), and others.

RDS MODE/FREQ EON

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM36

English

BASIC

OPERATION

PTY SEEK function

If you select the desired program type, the unit

automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are

broadcasting a program of the required type.

1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the station the unit is currently

receiving , or “NEWS” flashes on the front panel

display.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the

desired program type.

The selected program type appears on the front panel

display.

3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching

all preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the “PTY

HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display

while the unit is searching for stations.

• The unit will stop searching if a station that is

broadcasting a program of the required type is

found.

• If the station found is not the desired one, press

PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins

searching for another station that is broadcasting a

program of the same type.

■ To cancel this function

Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.

EON function

This function uses the EON data service on the RDS

station network. If you select the desired program type

(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit

automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are

scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and

switches from the station being currently received to the

new station when the broadcasts starts.

Note

• This function can only be used when an RDS station that

offers the EON data service is being received. When the unit is

tuned to such a station, the “EON” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

1 Check that the “EON” indicator lights up on

the front panel display.

If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to

another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator

lights up.

2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired

program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or

SPORT).

The selected program type name appears on the front

panel display.

• If a preset RDS station of the selected program

type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically

switch from the program being currently received

to that program. (EON indicator flashes.)

• When broadcasting of the required program ends,

the unit returns to the previous station (or another

program on the same station).

■ To cancel this function

Press EON repeatedly until the program type name

disappears from the front panel display.

Flashes

Lights up

RECEIVING RDS STATIONS

MODE START

PTY SEEK

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

MODE START

PTY SEEK

PTY HOLD

EON

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM37

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in standby

mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off the external component(s)

connected to AC OUTLET(S).

The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.

• By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you

can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation

instructions of the timer.

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly

to set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP,

the front panel display changes

as shown below.

3 The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front

panel display soon after the sleep timer has

been set.

The display then returns to the previous indication.

SLEEP TIMER

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears on the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns

to the previous indication.

• The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this

unit in standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote

control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by

disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

SLEEP

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

DSP

HiFi

SLEEP

VOLUME

L R

ROCK CONCERT

V-AUXVCR

D-TV/CBL

DVD

MD/CD-R

TUNER CD

DSP

HiFi

SLEEP

VOLUME

L R

SLEEP 120min

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM38

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed on other recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for these components for details on

their operation .

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Front panel Remote control

RECORDING

Notes

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in standby mode, you cannot record

between the components connected to it.

• DSP programs and volume, bass, and treble settings do not

affect the recorded material.

• You cannot record from a source connected to the 6CH

INPUT jacks on this unit.

• Input sources are not output to the same OUT (REC) channel.

(For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to

VCR OUT.)

• This unit’s DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT(REC)

jacks are independent. To record a source using a digital

recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack, connect the source component to one of the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

• Check the copyright laws in your country if you wish to

record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of

copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws.

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS material

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, follow the

operating instructions of your player to set it to output an

analog signal, if it is compatible with the DTS format.

INPUT

AUTO/MANUAL MONO

MAN`L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE MEMORY

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

FM/AM

RAUDIOLVIDEO

EFFECT

PRESET/TUNING

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAMSTEREOSPEAKERS

6CH INPUTINPUT MODE

SILENT

PHONES

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

STANDBY

/ON

BASS/TREBLE

CONTROL

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

INPUT

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 03.1.16, 11:40 AM39

Adjusting the items on the set

Use the remote control to make adjustments.

• You can change set menu parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

• You can use NEXT and SET MENU +/– on the front panel to

change these settings, if the unit is not set to TUNER mode.

Press NEXT to select the category or field you wish to change,

and SET MENU +/– to change the parameters.

Note

• You cannot change some set menu parameters while the unit is

in night listening mode.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU to enter

the set menu.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the desired

menu.

4 Press j / i to enter the selected menu.

5 Press u / d repeatedly to select the item

you want to adjust.

• By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in

the same order as when pressing d.

AMP

SET MENU

You can set the following parameters on the set menu to

obtain a better sound from the unit. Change the settings to

reflect the needs of your listening environment.

Set menu list

The set menus are divided by use and function into the 4

categories listed here.

■ BASIC

The BASIC area contains the basic parameters that you

must set before using this unit. It consists of the following

menus. See pages 19 – 21 for a detailed explanation.

1 SETUP

2 SP LEVEL (Speaker level)

■ SOUND

The SOUND area contains parameters for altering sound

output. It consists of the following menus that you can

use to alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the

system.

1 SPEAKER SET

2 SP DISTANCE (Speaker distance)

3 LFE LEVEL (Low frequency effect level)

4 D. RANGE (Dynamic range)

5 CENTER GEQ (Center graphic equalizer)

6 HP TONE CTRL (Headphone tone control)

■ INPUT

The INPUT area contains parameters concerned with

signal input. It consists of the following menus that you

can use to change the assignment of input jacks.

1 I/O ASSIGN

2 INPUT MODE

■ OPTION

This is a supplementary set up menu provided for your

convenience. It consists of the following menus that you

can use to change display brightness, protect existing

settings, and perform other non-essential functions.

1 DISPLAY SET

2 MEM. GUARD

3 AUDIO MUTE

4 ZONE SET

• In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the

default setting is indicated in bold.

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

3,5,8

4,6,7

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM40

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

6 Press j / i once to enter

the setup mode of the

selected item.

The last setting you adjusted

appears on the front panel

display.

Depending on the menu item,

press u/d to select a sub

item.

7 Press j / i repeatedly to

change the menu item

setting.

8 Press u / d repeatedly until the menu

disappears or just press one of the DSP

program group buttons to exit from the set

menu.

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than

one week, the stored data will be lost. If this happens,

adjust the items again.

The BASIC and SOUND menus

The “BASIC” menu allows you to easily set the

“SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” and “SOUND 2 SP

DISTANCE” parameters. It is not necessary to reset

any of the parameters in the “BASIC” menu, but you

can access more detailed parameters in the “SOUND”

menu if you wish.

Note

• After altering parameters in the “SOUND” menu, if you

select “BASIC 1 SETUP” and then select “SET”, the

parameters from the “SOUND” menu alter in response to

any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. Do not enter

the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu unless you wish to change

these settings. If you accidentally enter the “BASIC 1

SETUP” menu, select “CANCEL” to return to the

“BASIC” menu. (page 20)

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET

(speaker mode settings)

Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your

speaker configuration.

Note

• Some menu item settings have no effect when the unit is

reproducing a source with a digital signal sampling frequency

greater than 48 kHz.

■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode)

If you add a center speaker to your speaker configuration,

this unit can provide better dialog localization for several

listeners and superior synchronization of sound and

images.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the

center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small center speaker. The unit

directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of

the center channel to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a center speaker. The unit

directs all of the center channel signal to the main left and

right speakers.

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM41

■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode)

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

LARGE

Select this if you have large main speakers. The unit

directs the entire range of the main left and right channel

signals to the main left and right speakers.

SMALL

Select this if you have small main speakers. The unit

directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of

the main channel to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or

if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The

entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the

rear left and right speakers.

SML

Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.

The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear

channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E

BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have rear speakers.

• This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you

select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center

speaker will automatically be set to NON and the “1D REAR

CT” item will be skipped.

■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker mode)

If you add a rear center speaker to your speaker

configuration, this unit can provide more realistic front-

to-back transitions.

Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)

LRG

Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the rear center channel

signal to the rear center speaker.

SML

Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below)

of the rear center channel to the speakers selected with

“1E BASS”.

NON

Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. The

unit directs all of the rear center channel signal to the rear

left and right speakers.

■ 1E BASS (bass out mode)

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency

signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-

frequency signals can be directed to both main left and

right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be

used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH

SWFR

Select this if you use a subwoofer. The unit directs the

LFE signals to the subwoofer.

MAIN

Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The unit directs

LFE signals to the main speakers.

BOTH

The unit directs LFE signals to the subwoofer. Low-

frequency signals designated to the main channels in

accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed

to both main speakers and the subwoofer.

Note

• When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the unit directs the

low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel

to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main

speaker mode.

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM42

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE

(speaker distance)

Use this feature to adjust the delay applied to center and

rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there

is sound output from the center speakers with a source

such as Dolby Digital or DTS. Ideally, the center speaker

and the rear speakers should be the same distance from

the main listening position as the left and right main

speakers. However, in most home situations, the center

speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line with

the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the

sound from the center speaker and the rear speakers, you

can adjust the apparent distance from the center speaker

and the rear speakers to the main listening position to

make it seem the same as the distance between the

listening position and main left and right speakers.

1 Press u / d to select “UNIT”.

2 Press j / i to select the unit “meters” or

“feet” to be used in setting.

3 Press u / d to select the speaker for which

you want to adjust the delay.

4 Press j / i to set the delay.

Press i for higher values and j for lower values.

■ Setting by “meters”

Control range: 0.3 to 24.00 m (for main L/R, center,

rear L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 2.10 m (for rear center)

■ Setting by “feet”

Control range: 1 to 80 ft (for main L/R, center, rear

L/R, rear center)

Initial settings: 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/

R), 7.0 ft (for rear center)

Note

• No delay will be set if you set the same distance for the main

L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center.

SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE

(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a

Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries low-

frequency special effect sound which is only added to

certain scenes.

Control range:

SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB

HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

1 Press u / d to select the item to be

adjusted.

2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.

Note

• Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones.

SOUND 4 D. RANGE

(dynamic range)

Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting

is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital

signals.

Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)

MAX

Select MAX for feature films.

STD

Select STD for general use.

MIN

Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels.

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM43

SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center

graphic equalizer)

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches

that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies.

Control range (dB): –6 to +6

Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band

1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u

to select a lower frequency.

2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that

frequency.

Note

• You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this

parameter by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting

the foregoing procedure. Once you begin this procedure, the

test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how

the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels.

To stop the test tone, press TEST.

SOUND 6

HP TONE CTRL

(headphone tone control)

Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble

when you are using headphones.

Control range (dB):

BASS .................... –6 to +3

TRBL (treble) ....... –6 to +3

Initial setting:

BASS .................... 0 dB

TRBL.................... 0 dB

INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/

output assignment)

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or

DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component

names for jacks) differ from those of the component. This

lets you to change the jack assignment and effectively

connect more components.

Once assigned, select that component with INPUT (or the

input selector buttons on the remote control).

■ 1A for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks

Choices: [A] DVD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL

[B] DVD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL

■ 1B for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack

Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 1C for OPTICAL INPUT jacks

Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(3) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

(4) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

■ 1D for COAXIAL INPUT jack

Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX,

D-TV/CBL, DVD

Notes

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM44

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD

(memory guard)

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings

on the unit.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect the following features:

• All set menu items

• Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels

• DSP program parameters

Notes

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.

• When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other set

menu items.

OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE

Adjusts the amount by which the MUTE function reduces

the output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –50dB, –20dB

MUTE

Completely halts all output of sound.

–50dB

Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 50dB.

–20dB

Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 20dB.

INPUT 2 INPUT MODE

(initial input mode)

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

this unit on (see page 24 for details about the input

mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

AUTO

Select this setting to allow the unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

LAST

Select this setting to set this unit to automatically select

the last input mode used for the respective sources.

OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET

■ DIMMER

Use this to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Control range: –4 to 0

■ V CONV. (Video conversion)

(With the exception of China and General models)

Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of

composite signals to S-video signals to output through the

S-video jack when the unit is receiving a video signal that

is not in the S-video format.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video

signals.

OFF

Select OFF to stop the conversion of composite signals to

S-video signals.

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM45

OPTION 4 ZONE SET

■ SP B (speaker B set)

Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: MAIN, ZONE B

MAIN

Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the

speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set

in the main room.

ZONE B

Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned

OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers

including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and

the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only.

Notes

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit,

the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

SET MENU

0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM46

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other

manufacturers. To control other components, set up the remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes.

Control area

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

★/★★ buttons and input

selector buttons switch the

control area for each component.

* ★/★★ buttons are to operate

the other components that are

not connected to this unit.

Component control area

You can control up to 9 different components by setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see page 49).

★/★★ buttons

and input

selector buttons

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM POWER,

STANDBY, SLEEP,

6CH INPUT,

VOLUME +/– and

MUTE) function in

any mode.

Press AMP to

control this unit.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

TV AV

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

■ Controlling other component

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button.

0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM47

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Setting the manufacturer code

You can control other components by setting a

manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9

component controls.

The following table shows factory-set component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each component control.

1 Press an input selector button or ★/★★ to

select the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES”

at the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Notes

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

code, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

CODE SET

Component

control

(buttons)

MD/CD-R

TUNER

DVD

D-TV/CBL

V-AUX

VCR

★

★★

Component category

(Library)

TUNER

DVD

–

Manufacturer

YAMAHA

–

TRANSMIT

Code

0005

0024

0003

0098

–

CODE SET

TRANSMIT

Clearing setup manufacturer

codes

■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the

component control

1 Press an input selector button or ★/★★ to

select the component control for which you

want to clear the manufacturer code.

2 Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.

Note

• If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,

the clearing process cancels. If this happens, start over from

step 1.

3 Enter the code number “0000”.

The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the

manufacturer code for the selected component is

cleared.

• You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering

the code number “9990”.

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

★

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

★★

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

AUX

TV/CBL

VCR

★

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

★★

0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM48

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Controlling other components

DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV CD player CD/MD recorder Tuner

1 AV POWER *

Power *

VCR power *

Power *

Power

2 TV POWER *

TV power *

TV power

3 TV CH + *

TV channel up *

TV channel up TV channel up *

TV channel up *

TV channel up

TV CH – *

TV channel down

TV channel down TV channel down

TV channel down

4 TV VOL + *

TV volume up *

TV volume up TV volume up *

TV volume up *

TV volume up

TV VOL – *

TV volume down

TV volume down TV volume down

TV volume down

5 TV MUTE *

TV mute *

TV mute TV mute *

TV mute *

TV mute

6 TV INPUT *

TV input *

TV input TV input *

TV input *

TV input

7 1-9, 0, +10

Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)

8 TITLE Title

9 PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up

PRESET/CH d Down

VCR channel down

Preset down

PRESET/CH j Left

PRESET/CH i Right

SELECT Select

0 RETURN Return

REC/DISC SKIP

Disc skip Rec *

VCR rec Disc skip Rec (MD)

w Play Play *

VCR play Play Play

Search backward Search backward

VCR search backward

Search backward Search backward

r Search forward Search forward *

VCR search forward

Search forward Search forward

AUDIO Audio

d Pause Pause *

VCR pause Pause Pause

t Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward

y Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward

a Stop Stop *

VCR stop Stop Stop

w ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index

e MENU Menu A/B/C/D/E

r DISPLAY Display Display Display

This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ★★. When the

manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ★★ areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area.

These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.

You can operate other components if you have set the

manufacturer code for your component in the remote

control. Note, however, that some buttons may not

operate the component correctly.

Once you select an input source, the remote control

switches to the mode for operating the component.

POWER

SLEEP

CODE SET

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

6CH INPUT

SYSTEM

AUX

TV/CBL

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

POWER POWER

AVTV

VCR

DVD

MD/CD-R TUNERCD

–

TV CHTV VOL

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM49

Using the test tone

Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume

from each speaker is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press TEST.

The unit will output a test tone.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a speaker

to adjust.

Each time you press d, the unit will cycle through

the speakers in the following order:

TEST LEFT(main L)→TEST

CENTER(center)→TEST RIGHT(main R)→TEST R

SUR.(rear R)→TEST REAR CNTR (rear

center)→TEST L SUR.(rear L)→TEST

SUBWOOFER(subwoofer)→.....

(Press u to cycle the speakers in the reverse order.)

4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

5 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone halts.

Notes

• You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the

PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

• You cannot adjust speaker volumes if the “SOUND 1

SPEAKER SET” parameter on the set menu is set to NON.

• You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS”

parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is

set to MAIN.

• If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then

select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any

changes you make in ”BASIC 1 SETUP”.

• Depending on the source the unit is reproducing, the speaker

levels set with the test tone may not be to your liking. If this is

the case, adjust the speaker levels while listening to the

source.

SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS

Adjusting the volume during

playback

You can adjust the volume of the speakers while listening

to sound playback.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

The unit cycles through the speakers in the following

order each time you press LEVEL:

MAIN L→CENTER→MAIN R→R SUR.

(rear R)→REAR CT (rear center)→L SUR.

(rear L)→SWFR (subwoofer)→.....

• Pressing LEVEL once opens the level display. Press u / d at

this time to select a speaker.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volume.

• The center and rear speakers can be adjusted by a

maximum of –10dB ~ +10dB.

• The main speakers and subwoofer can be adjusted

by a maximum of –20dB ~ 0dB.

Notes

• You cannot adjust speaker levels if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER

SET” parameter in the set menu is set to NON.

• You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS”

parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is

set to MAIN.

• If you use LEVEL to adjust speaker levels, the speaker levels

you previously set with the test tone will also change.

• If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then

select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any

changes you make in ”BASIC 1 SETUP”.

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

2,5

0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:41 AM50

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

Changing parameter settings

The initial sound field program settings will provide you

with an excellent listening experience as they are. It is not

necessary to alter these settings, but you can create an

original listening environment by doing so.

Note

• The editable parameters vary depending on the sound field

program you select. Refer to the explanation for the parameter.

1 Press AMP.

2 Select a sound field program.

3 Press u / d to select the

parameter you want to

change.

4 Press j / i to change the

parameter setting.

SET MENU

SELECT

PRESET/CH

TV INPUT

TV MUTE

A/B/C/D/E

VOLUME

LEVEL

TEST

STEREO

EFFECT

RETURN

DISPLAY

TITLE

MUTE

AMP

VCR

–

TV CHTV VOL

–

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

AMP

STEREO

EFFECT

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

NIGHT

6.1/5.1

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

ROCK

CONCERT

JAZZ CLUB

3421

ENTER

+10

67 8

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

SELECT

PRESET/CH

–

5 Repeat steps 2 – 4 if you wish to alter other

parameters.

Note

• You cannot alter these parameters if the “OPTION 2 MEM.

GUARD” parameter in the set menu is set to ON. Change this

setting to OFF if you wish to alter any other parameters.

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM51

Digital sound field parameter descriptions

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

■ DSP LEVEL

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the direct sound.

Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB

■ DELAY

Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the

beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is

generated.

Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Control range varies depending on the input source and the DSP program you use.)

For 6ch Stereo

Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

Control range: 0 to 100%

■ CT LEVEL (Center level)

■ RL LEVEL (Rear left level)

■ RR LEVEL (Rear right level)

■ RC LEVEL (Rear center level)

For PRO LOGIC II Music

■ PANORAMA

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

■ DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

■ CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the main left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For DTS Neo:6 Music

■ C. IMAGE (Center Image)

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control Range: 0 to 0.5

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM52

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

TROUBLESHOOTING

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed

below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

■ General

Problem

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in standby

mode soon after the

power has been

turned on.

No sound.

The picture does not

appear.

The sound suddenly

goes off.

Cause

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on

the rear panel is not fully set to either the

left or right position.

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Incorrect input or output cable connec-

tions.

No appropriate input source is selected.

The speaker connections are not secure.

The main speakers have not been selected

properly.

The volume is turned down.

The sound is muted.

Digital signals which this unit cannot

reproduce are being received from a

source component e.g; a CD-ROM.

The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

The protection circuit has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

The sleep timer has turned the unit off.

The sound is muted.

Remedy

Connect the power cord firmly.

Set the switch fully to the left or right position when

this unit is in standby mode.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection is not touching anything other than

its respective connection.

Set this unit in standby mode, disconnect the power

cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it

normally.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or

6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).

Secure the connections.

Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

Turn up the volume.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to

cancel mute and adjust the volume.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

Connect components using the same type of video

jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPO-

NENT VIDEO) for both the input and output.

Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to

the appropriate position and then turn the unit back

on.

Check the speaker wires are not touching each other

and then turn the unit back on.

Turn on the power, and play the source again.

Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

Refer to

page

–

16 – 17

–

10 – 17

16 – 17

–

10 – 11

–

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM53

Problem

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

No sound from the

center speaker.

No sound from the

rear speakers.

No sound from the

subwoofer.

Poor bass

reproduction.

Cause

Incorrect cable connections.

The sound effect is switched off.

A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS

decoding DSP program is being used with

material not encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.

A digital signal with a sampling

frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to

this unit.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

“SOUND 1A CENTER” on the set menu

is set to NON.

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)

has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo).

The source encoded with a Dolby Digital

or DTS signal does not have a center

channel signal.

The output level of the rear speakers is set

to minimum.

A monaural source is being played with

program 9.

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or

DTS signal is being played.

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel

source is being played.

The source does not contain low bass

signals (90 Hz and below).

“SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is

set to SWFR or BOTH and your system

does not include a subwoofer.

The speaker mode settings (main, center,

rear, or rear center) on the set menu does

not match your speaker configuration.

Remedy

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the level of the center speaker.

Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.

Select another DSP program.

Raise the output level of the rear speakers.

Select another DSP program.

Select SWFR or BOTH.

Select BOTH.

Select MAIN.

Select the appropriate position for each speaker based

on the size of the speakers in your configuration.

Refer to

page

–

25 – 30

–

25 – 30

–

25 – 30

–

41 – 42

TROUBLESHOOTING

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM54

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem

No sound from the rear

center speaker.

A “humming” sound can

be heard.

The volume level cannot

be increased, or the

sound is distorted.

The sound effect cannot

be recorded.

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of

this unit.

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on the

unit cannot be changed.

The unit does not

operate properly.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears on the front

panel display.

There is noise interfer-

ence from digital or

high-frequency

equipment, or this unit.

The unit suddenly turns

into standby mode.

Cause

“SOUND 1C REAR LR” or “SOUND 1D

REAR CT” on the set menu is set to NON.

The Dolby Digital EX or the DTS-ES

decoder is not switched on.

Incorrect cable connections.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

There is no source component connected

to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.

“OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set

menu is set to ON.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

The speaker cables are short circuited.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

The internal temperature has become too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Remedy

Select LRG or SML.

Press 6.1/5.1 on the remote control to switch the

decoder on.

Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

Turn on the power to the component.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks of this unit.

Set “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu

to OFF.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet

and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

Make sure all speaker cables are connected

correctly.

Move this unit further away from such

equipment.

Wait until the unit cools down and then turn it

back on.

Refer to

page

–

10 – 12

–

TROUBLESHOOTING

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM55

■ Tuner

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

There are buzzing and

whining noises

(especially in the

evening).

Problem

Cause

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

There is multipath interference.

The station is too weak.

The unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

A TV set is being used nearby.

Remedy

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

Use the manual tuning method.

Re-store the stations.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and

orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

Move this unit away from the TV.

Refer to

page

–

■ Remote control

Problem

The remote control does

not work nor function

properly.

Cause

Wrong distance or angle.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

The batteries are weak.

The manufacture code has not correctly

set.

Even if the manufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

Remedy

The remote control will function within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more

than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.

Reposition this unit.

Replace all batteries with new ones.

Set the code correctly.

Try setting another code of the same manufac-

turer.

Refer to

page

–

TROUBLESHOOTING

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM56

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

GLOSSARY

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for

dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound

within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-

over” and “fly-around” effects.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround

software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-

channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1

center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead

of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel

sources in addition to the movie mode.

■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital

Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can

enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial

representation of DTS digital surround in your home.

This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel

sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear

channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a

total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to

existing 5.1-channel format.

■ Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by a specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range of channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

■ LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1 channel systems.

■ CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and

designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,

such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and

so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are

differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth

of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

■ SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed using headphones.

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM57

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any rear speakers by using

virtual rear speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

■ S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

■ Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the P

and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in

order to use the component signal for output.

GLOSSARY

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM58

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS

AUDIO SECTION

• Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 80 W

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 95 W

[Other models]

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 70 W

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 85 W

• DIN Standard Output Power

[Europe model]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 115 W

• IEC Power

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 80 W

• Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China, Korea and General models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 100 W

• Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 100/125/160/200 W

[Other models] .................................................. 90/110/145/180 W

• Damping Factor

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 100 or more

• Frequency Response

CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06%

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB

• Tone Control (Main L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz

• Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω

• Input Sensitivity

CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ

6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ

• Output Level

OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ

OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ

VIDEO SECTION

• Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL

• Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB

• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 30 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)

Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)

• Usable sensitivity (IHF, Mono) ............................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%

• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB

• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

• Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz

[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz

[Korea model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 270 W/360 VA

[Other models] ..................................................................... 270 W

Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.8 W

• AC Outlets

[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]

.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)

[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)

• Dimension (W x H x D)

..................... 435 x 161 x 390 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 15-3/8”)

• Weight .............................................................. 11.0 kg (24 lbs 4 oz)

*Specifications are subject to change without notice.

0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 03.1.16, 11:42 AM59

LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES

LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS

LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES

LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER

LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE

LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES

LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES

ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,

1021, 1081

AIKO 0891

AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,

1191, 1351, 1591,

1641, 1791, 1891,

1981

AKURA 1331

ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361

ALBIRAL 1971

AMSTRAD 1301, 1511

ANAM 1171

ARC EN CIEL 0571

ARCAM 0571, 0761

ARISTONA 0751

ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641

ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,

0781, 0871, 1021,

1081, 1421, 2051,

2091, 2151, 2551

ASTRA 1511

ATANTIC 0761

ATLANTIC 0761

ATORI 1511

AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511

AUSIND 0491, 1411

AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,

0491, 0601, 0781,

0951, 1051, 1081,

1391, 1421

BAIRD 1101, 1351

BANG & OLUFSEN 1081

BASIC LINE 1321, 1331

BAUER 1451

BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,

0131, 0221, 1561

BEKO 2491, 2501

BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,

0251, 0471, 0741,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,

0901, 1821

BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081

BRITANNIA 0761

BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,

1081

BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,

1901, 1981

BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,

1641, 1741, 2131,

2151

BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611

CANDLE 0791

CENTURY 1021, 1081

CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,

1401, 1531, 1611,

1621, 1981, 2201,

2251, 2271

CITIZEN 0791

CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971

CLATRONIC 1181, 1331

CONCERTO 0791

CONDOR 0761

CONTEC 0151, 1171

CONTINENTAL EDISON

0571, 0651, 0901

CRAIG 1171

CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,

1081, 1401, 1981,

2201, 2251, 2271

CROWN 2541

CTC CLATRONIC 0261

CXC 1171

DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,

2611

DANSAI 0101

DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1691

DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,

1101, 1681

DEGRAAF 0451, 1351

DIXI 0991, 1511

DOMEOS 0101

DORIC 1031

DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,

1641, 2101

DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,

2111

DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,

1021, 1081, 1981,

2121, 2151

DYNATRON 0101

ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031

ELECTRO TECH 1511

ELEKTRONSKA 0771

ELMAN 0261, 1621

ELTA 1511

EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,

1121, 1171, 1261,

1301

ERRES 0101

ETRON 1981

EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,

0771, 1091, 1621,

2001

FENNER 0101, 1511

FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,

0651, 0781, 0861,

0881, 1131, 1181,

1361, 1461, 1971,

1991, 2281, 2311,

2341

FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281

FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,

1931, 2281

FILMNET 1141

FINLANDIA 0451, 2321

FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,

0521, 0781, 0811,

0871, 1081, 1411,

1421, 1981, 2051,

2091, 2121, 2151,

2551

FIRST LINE 1981

FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,

0511, 0601, 0801,

0821, 0981, 1021,

1081, 1981, 2091

FORGESTONE 2281

FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,

1081, 1451, 1541,

1981

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0021, 0431, 0451,

0591, 1411

FORTRESS 1081

FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981

FUJITSU 1261

FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,

1181, 1261

FUTURETECH 1171

GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,

1511, 1621, 1981

GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,

2321

GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,

0601, 1101, 1281,

1561

GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,

1321, 1511, 1621,

1981

GENERAL TECHNIC

2681

GENEXXA 0451, 1331

GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,

1641, 2301

GORENJE 0981, 1061

GRAETZ 0451

GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,

0581, 0601, 1101,

1111, 1351, 1981,

2321

GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,

0451, 0491, 0581,

0601, 1031, 1311,

1521, 1561, 1641

GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,

0491, 0711, 0741,

1381, 2021, 2041,

2141, 2151

HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,

0431, 0591, 1561

HANTAREX 0581

HEMMERMANN 0061

HIFIVOX 0331, 0571

HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,

1261, 1351, 1511,

1641, 1981, 2011

HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,

0081, 0141, 0291,

0331, 0341, 0451,

0601, 0631, 0701,

1281, 1561, 1601,

1821, 1831, 1841,

1861, 1871, 1881,

1891, 1941, 1981,

2051, 2321, 2341

HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,

1621

IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1401, 1611,

1621, 2201, 2251,

2271

INGERSOL 1511

INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,

1101, 1331, 1371,

1511, 2011

INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,

0121, 0181, 0451,

0491, 1081, 1641,

1791, 1821, 1981,

2231

IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,

1371, 1411, 1511,

2011

ISUKAI 1331

ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431

JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441,

1581, 1591, 1741,

1791

KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331

KAMOSONIC 0601

KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,

1091, 1321, 1511,

1561, 2051

KAWASHO 0761

KENDO 0261

KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,

1981

KONKA 2701

KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,

1081, 1541

KTV 0601, 1171

LENOIR 0601, 1511

LEYEO 1181

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0591, 0601,

0761, 0791, 1371,

1491, 1511, 1561,

1621, 1641

0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 03.1.16, 2:03 PM2

LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,

0611, 1081

LOGIC 1691, 2281

LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281

LOWEWE 0831

LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901

LUXMAN 0791

LUXMAN STEREO TUNER

0791

LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,

0341, 0421, 0451,

0461, 0491, 0601,

0671, 1351, 1371,

1561, 1601, 1911,

1921, 1981

LYCO 1181

MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,

0581, 0641, 0771,

1021, 1081, 1621,

1981

MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 2001

MANESTH 0101

MARANTZ 0101

MARELLI 1081

MARK 0101

MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,

0691, 1101, 1151,

1241, 1271, 1301,

1511, 1561, 1681,

1691

MAXIMAL 0071, 1981

MCMICHAEL 1281

MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,

2621, 2641, 2651,

2661, 2671, 2681,

2691, 2711, 2721,

2761, 2771, 2781

MEMOREX 1511

METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,

1041, 1081, 1481,

2071, 2081

MGA 1231

MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,

2651, 2711, 2761,

2771, 2781

MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,

1381, 2141, 2151

MISTRAL 2281

MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,

0661, 1191, 1201,

1231, 1671, 1691,

1741

MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,

0591, 0761, 0771,

1371, 1431, 2031

MTC 0791

MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,

0641, 0981, 1321,

1511

MURPHY 0451, 2091

MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031

N.E.I. 0101, 0961

NAD 1341

NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,

1731

NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,

0981, 1081,

1561, 1931,

1981, 2211,

2231, 2241

NEDIATOR 0101

NICAMAGIC 0761

NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,

1701, 2011

NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,

0641, 1381, 1411

NOGAMATIC 0571

NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,

0061, 0071, 0081,

0181, 0411, 0451,

0491, 1241, 1291,

1351, 1501, 1601,

1641, 1741, 1921,

1981, 2091, 2331,

2431, 2461, 2791

NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 1051, 1131,

1591, 1791, 1811,

1821, 1891, 1941,

2631

OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981

OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,

0441, 1661

ONCEAS 0601

ONWA 1171

ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,

0851, 1211, 1241,

1251, 1301, 1481,

1511, 1681, 1691,

1981, 2371, 2421

OSAKA 2011

OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011

OSUME 0151

OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,

0141, 0221, 0601,

1561, 1741, 1981

PAEL 0591, 1411

PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,

0451, 0701, 1311,

1751, 1961, 2561,

2741

PANORAMIC 2351

PATHE MARCONI 0571

PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,

1621, 1661, 1971

PAUSA 1511

PAUZA 1511

PERDIO 0891, 1101

PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,

0981, 1021, 1081,

1401, 1611, 1621,

1751, 2201, 2251,

2271, 2451, 2471

PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,

0621, 0681, 0751,

0761, 1021, 1081,

1281, 2031, 2281,

2291, 2431, 2441,

2511, 2731

PHOENIX 1081

PHONOLA 0751, 1081

PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,

1821

PRANDONI-PRINCE

0411, 0451,

0491, 0581, 1411

PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451,

0491, 0581

PRIMA 0451

PROFEX 1981

PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981

QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,

0221, 0231, 0391,

0491, 0521, 0601,

0781, 1371, 1381,

1411, 1421, 1641,

1681, 2051, 2091,

2141, 2151, 2201,

2211, 2231, 2241,

2251, 2271, 2551,

2571, 2581

RADIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,

0661, 0771, 1081

RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091

RADIOLA 2291

RANK 0481, 2151

RBM 2131, 2151

RBM (UK) 0481

REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,

1981, 2331

REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,

1031

REX 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

RFT 0991, 2511

ROADSTAR 1321, 1511

ROTEL 0151

SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,

0451, 0531, 0541,

0571, 0581, 0651,

0731, 0931, 1021,

1071, 1081, 1131,

1791, 1811, 1821,

1891, 1941, 2631

SACCS 1971

SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,

1241, 1301, 1511,

1671, 1681, 1691

SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,

0071, 0341, 0451,

0671, 1291, 1351,

1521, 1561, 1601,

1641, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1981, 2321

SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,

0641, 1091, 1371,

1411, 2001

SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,

0981, 1101, 1181,

1371, 1511, 2011

SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,

0601, 0801, 0821,

0981, 1021, 1101,

1111, 1291, 1351,

1691, 1741, 2051,

2091, 2551

SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,

2281

SCHAUB LORENZ 0451

SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,

0451, 0511, 0591,

0601, 0751, 1321,

1361, 1621, 1641,

2101, 2111, 2291

SCOTT 1171, 1261

SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,

0991

SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,

1301, 1481, 1981

SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SENTRA 1601

SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,

1761, 1781

SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,

0641, 1021, 1081,

1981

SICATEL 1971

SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,

0451, 0741, 2011,

2201, 2211, 2221,

2231, 2241, 2261,

2571, 2581

SILVER 1181

SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,

1081

SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,

0261, 0391, 0641,

0691, 0851, 0941,

1021, 1081, 1241,

1301, 1321, 1481,

1631, 1981

SKANTIC 0451

SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011

SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511

SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,

1681, 1691, 2751

SOUNDESIGN 1171

SSS 1171

STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

SUNKAI 0691

SUPRA 0791

TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,

1021, 1421, 1771,

1791, 2081

TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,

1531

TASHIKO 0141

TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,

0971, 1101, 1681,

1691

TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,

2761, 2771, 2781

TECHNICS 1311

TECHWOOD 0791

TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261

TELE 1141

TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,

1821

TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,

0551, 0731, 1131,

1471, 1591, 1791,

1801, 1811, 1821,

1991, 2161, 2171,

2181, 2191, 2201,

2251, 2271, 2521,

2631

TELETECH 1511

TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,

2411

TENSAI 1331, 2091

TEXET 0601

THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,

0571, 0631, 0651,

0731, 0901, 1241,

1571, 1591, 1791,

1811, 1821, 1891,

1941, 2531

THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,

2251, 2271, 2281

0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 03.1.16, 2:03 PM3

THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,

0551, 0651, 0781,

0861, 0881, 1131,

1181, 1361, 1461,

1971, 1991, 2281

TMK 0141, 0791, 1471

TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,

1221, 1271, 1701,

1741, 1851, 2151,

2801, 2811

TRANS CONTINENS

0451

TRISTAR 2281

TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121

UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,

0491, 0511, 1311,

1541

ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,

1021, 1081, 1981

UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051

UNIVOX 1971

VEGAVOX 0811

VEXA 0101, 1511

VIDEOTON 2481

VORTEC 0101, 0651

VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,

1021, 1081

WALTHAM 0451

WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241

WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,

0591, 0641, 0761,

1091, 1971, 1981,

2001

WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981

WEGA COLOR 1021

WELTBLICK 0101

WESTON 1621

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0101, 0261, 0431,

0591, 0761, 1401,

1541

YOKO 0601, 1511

ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,

0411, 0451, 0951,

1901, 2061, 2101,

2111

ZOPPAS 0451

CABLE TV

CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476

CLYDE CABLEVISION

1426

FILMNET 1396, 1436

FRANCE TELECOM 1386

GEC 1426

JERROLD 1416

MOVIE TIME 1466

NSC 1466

PHILIPS 1386

PIONEER 0006

SAMSUNG 1496

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

1486, 1506

STARCOM 1416

STS 1466

TANDBERG 1366

TELE 1436

TELE +1 1436

TELESERVICE 1406, 1476

TUDI 1376

UNITED CABLE 1416

ZENITH 1406

SATELLITE TUNER

AKAI 1276

ALBA 0826, 1276

AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,

1026, 1296

ANKARO 0476

AST 0406

ASTRA 0126

BARCOM 0476

BLAUPUNKT 0966

BMC SATELLITE 0106

BRITISH TELECOM 1276

BUSH 0826

BUSH (UK) 0956

CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276

CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)

1536

CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006

COLUMBUS 0616

CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426

DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866

DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476

DRAKE 1516

ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,

0626, 0666, 0926,

0996, 1046, 1056,

1066, 1106

ELTA 1286

ELTA SAT 0146

EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246

FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,

0296, 0846, 0956,

1306

FINLUX 0976

FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776

FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,

1056

GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336

GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,

0966

HIGH PERFORMANCE

0916

HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966

HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,

0946

ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886

ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156

JEEMON 0146

JERROLD 0846, 0986

JOHANSSON 0246

JVC 1276

KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,

0366, 1586

KOSMOS 0266

KYOSTAR 1036, 1086

LENG 0246

LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356

LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,

0466, 0506, 1156

MACAB 0356

MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,

0956

MEDION 1326, 1346

METZ 0966

MICROMAXX 1326, 1346

MITSUBISHI 0966

MORGANS 0596

MURATTO 0406

NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,

0786, 0836

NETWORK 0046

NIKKO 1136, 1146

NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,

0446, 1156, 1166,

1336

NORSAT 0786

OTTO VERSAND 0966

PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,

0936, 0956, 1306,

1566, 1576

PACE MSS 0946

PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK)

1526

PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706

PALSAT 0396

PALTEC 0706

PANASONIC 0806, 1306

PANSAT 1076

PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,

0956, 1126, 1186,

1196, 1206, 1216,

1306, 1316

PROSAT 1176

PTT TELECOM

0306, 0896

QUELLE 0966

RADIX 1056

REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786

RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,

1216

SAGEM 1256, 1546

SAKURA 0566, 0816

SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,

0446, 0456, 0486,

0496, 0576

SAMSUNG 0746, 0756

SAT 0406

SATCOM 0896

SATECO 0646

SECTOR 1266

SEDEA 1096

SENTRA 0416

SIEMENS 0896, 0966

SINTRACK 0906

SKYLAB 0476

SKYSCAN 0876

SONY 0736, 0946

STELLA 0306

STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,

1086

STV 0636

TANDBERG 1116

TANDY 0916

TANTEC 0616

TATUNG 0516, 0546

TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,

0556, 1056

TELECOM 0306

TELEMAX 0586

THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,

0176, 0186, 0956

TOSHIBA 0946

TPS (FRANCE) 1546

TRIAD 0406

UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,

0716, 0726

US ELECTRONICS 0886

VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076

VTECH 0436

WINERSAT 0246

WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,

0386, 0406, 0656,

1056, 1156

WOLSEY 0916

XCOM MULTIMEDIA

1556

XSAT (FRANCE) 1556

ZEHNDER 0266, 0406

ZENDER 0406

VCR

AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432

AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,

0582, 0612, 0642,

0652, 0762, 0912

ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,

0332, 0342, 0972

AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452

ANITECH 0002

ANITSCH 1002

ASA 0012, 0052

AUDIOSONIC 0002

BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492

BANG & OLUFSEN 0042

BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812

BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,

0462, 0672, 0992

BRIONVEGA 0032

BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,

0342, 0512, 0972

BUSH (UK) 0812

CAPEHART 0112

CGE 0042, 0432, 0762

CRAIG 0072, 0482

CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622

DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622

DANSAI 0012

DAYTRON 0112

DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,

0942

DECCA (UK) 0052

DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,

0532, 0602

DIXI 0442

DUAL 0042, 0632

DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532

DYNATECH 0432

DYNATRON 0012

ELBE 0122

ELIN 0072

EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,

0432, 0512, 0522

ERRES 0012

FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,

0852, 0902, 1012,

1022, 1082

FIDELITY 0432

FINLANDIA 0052, 0532

FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,

0082, 0262, 0382,

0432, 0462, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0602,

0912

FIRST LINE 0002, 0912

FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,

0542, 0572, 0592

FORMENTI-PHOENIX

0012, 0052

FRONTECH 0112

FUNAI 0432

GBC 0002

GEC (UK) 0022, 0052

GELOSO 0002

GENERAL TECHNIC1172

GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,

0432, 0502

GOODMANS (UK) 0002

GRAETZ 0022, 0042

GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,

0572

GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,

0462, 0602, 0812,

0822

III

0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 03.1.16, 2:03 PM4

GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,

0232, 0252, 0262,

0752, 0802

HANSEATIC 0052, 0812

HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922

HCM 0002

HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,

0442, 0522

HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,

0432, 0602, 0662,

0812, 1022

IMPERIAL 0072, 0432

INGERSOL 0442

INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072

INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172

INTERFUNK 0022, 0052

IRRADIO 0002, 0012

ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762

JENSEN 0042

JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142,

0272, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0902

KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812

KENDO 0492

KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0012, 0122,

0812, 0952

LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172

LLOYD 0432

LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152

LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442

LUMA 0162

LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812

M ELECTRONIC

0432

MAGNADYNE 0052

MAGNASONIC

0572

MANESTH 0012

MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,

0122, 0502

MARK 0012

MARTA 0012

MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,

0522, 0812, 0972

MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172

MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,

0482, 0532, 0572

METZ 0062, 0092, 0932

MGA 0912

MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172

MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252

MINOLTA 0172, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,

0912, 0922

MTC 0072, 0432

MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,

0282, 0432

MURPHY 0432

N.E.I. 0012, 0052

NATIONAL 0462

NEC 0042, 0122, 0142

NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,

0052, 0072,

0092, 0202,

0522, 0572,

0762, 0812

NIKKAI 0112

NOBLIKO 0092

NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,

0072, 0292, 0492,

0532, 0572, 0762,

1152

NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0222, 0242,

0392, 0402, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0792, 0832,

0842, 0872

OLYMPUS 0462

OPTONICA 0132, 0502

ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0982

OSAKA 0432

OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432

OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,

0812

PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,

0672, 0992, 1092,

1102, 1182

PENTAX 0172, 0602

PERDIO 0432

PHILCO 1062

PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,

0152, 0182, 0362,

0372, 0382, 0472,

0502, 1072

PHONOLA 0052, 0152

PILOT 0012

PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,

0472

PORTLAND 0112

PROLINE 0432

PYE 0052, 0152

QUARTZ 0572

QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,

0052, 0062, 0072,

0092, 0202, 0462,

0522, 0942

RADIONETTE 0022

REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,

0432, 0482, 0502,

0532, 0572

RET 1072

REX 0042, 0742, 0782

RICOH 0952

SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,

0222, 0242, 0392,

0632, 0732, 0742,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0792, 0872

SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,

0442, 0512, 0522,

0972

SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,

0822, 0912

SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,

0652, 1192

SANSUI 0042, 0142

SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,

0572

SBR 0052, 0152, 0182

SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042

SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,

0072, 0432

SEG 0002, 0072

SEI-SINUDYNE 0442

SELECO 0042

SENTRA 0112

SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702

SHINTOM 0002

SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,

0572

SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,

0932

SONOKO 0282

SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,

0692, 0942, 0952,

0962, 1122, 1132

STS 0602

SUNKAI 0512

SUNSTAR 0432

SYLVANIA 0432, 0912

SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912

TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,

0932

TASHIKO 0132, 0432

TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,

0922

TCM 1142, 1162, 1172

TEAC 0042, 0432

TECHNICS 0462

TEKNIKA 0012, 0432

TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,

0732, 0742, 0762,

0782, 0882, 0892

TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052

TENOSAL 0002

THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,

0192, 0402, 0632,

0762

THORN 0042, 0902

THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,

0302, 0712,

0722, 0742,

0762, 0852,

0862, 0872,

0902

TMK 0522

TONSAI 0002

TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912

TOTEVISION 0012, 0072

TRIUMPH 0922

UHER 0042, 0072

ULTRAVOX 0032

UNITECH 0072

VECTOR RESEARCH

0122

VIDEON 1162, 1172

WELTBLICK 0012

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

0032

XENON 0162

YAMAHA 0042, 1202

YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0058

AIWA 0218

DENON 0188

HITACHI 0198

JVC 0088, 0178

KENWOOD 0148

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0228

MAGNAVOX 0128

MITSUBISHI 0138

ONKYO 0068, 0128

PANASONIC 0028

PHILIPS 0098, 0128

PIONEER 0108, 0118

PROSCAN 0158

RCA 0158

SAMSUNG 0078

SHARP 0038

SONY 0018

TECHNICS 0028

THOMSON 0168

TOSHIBA 0048, 0128

YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098,

0208

ZENITH 0128

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0137

FUNAI 0137

HITACHI 0047

MAGNAVOX 0077

PANASONIC 0027

PIONEER 0037

RCA 0067

REALISTIC 0137

SAMSUNG 0017, 0087

SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,

0117

VICTOR 0127

YAMAHA 0007

CD PLAYER

ACCUPHASE 0315

ADC 0865

ADCOM 0785, 1015

AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,

0735, 0745, 0935,

1155

ARCAM 1875

ARCAM-ROTEL 0165

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835

AUDIOSONIC 0155

AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,

1765, 1915, 1935

BSR 0875

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

1075

CARRERA 0555, 0875

CARVER 0825, 1415

CYRUS-ROTEL 0205

DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,

1595, 1795, 1805

DUAL 1005

ELIN 0185

EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675

FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,

0825, 1165, 1175

GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,

0875, 0995, 1265,

1285, 1345, 1355,

1485, 1575, 1675,

1715, 1825

GRUNDIG 0175

HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,

0565, 1135, 1145,

1155

HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,

0945, 1005, 1015,

1225, 1545

INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015

ITT-NOKIA 0185

JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455,

0575, 0585

KARCHER 0485

KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,

0215, 0595, 0675,

0695, 0705, 0715,

0925, 1355, 1485,

1575, 1675, 1715,

1825

KORTING 0175

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0555, 1185,

1195, 1585

LIFETEC 2015

LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,

1655, 1665

LINN 0165, 1875

LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,

0805, 1295, 1305,

1555, 1925

0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 03.1.16, 2:03 PM5

LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905

MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875

MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,

0665, 1275, 1335,

1405, 1505, 1875,

1955

MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605

MCS 0535

MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,

2015

MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1675

MGA 1125

MICROMAXX 2015

MISSION 0165, 1875

MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205

NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,

0295, 0305, 0345,

0755, 0765, 1315,

1325

NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565

NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,

0785

NECKERMAN 0155, 0225

NIKKO 0835, 1165

OCEANIC 0185

OKANO 0155, 0225

ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,

1455, 1515

PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,

1625

PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,

1865, 1875

PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,

0435, 0445, 0525,

0855, 1035, 1945

PROTON 0905, 1875

QUASAR 1075

RADIOLA 1845, 1855

RADIOTONE 0485

REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,

1275, 1285, 1575

ROTEL 1875

SABA 1005

SAE 1875

SALORA 0185

SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,

0985, 1255, 1675,

1875

SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,

0915

SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855

SCOTT 1285, 1675

SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,

1115, 1275, 1635,

1785, 1815, 1825,

1835

SHERWOOD 1275, 1445

SIEMENS 1085

SIGNATURE 1155

SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,

0375, 0865, 1685,

1695, 1705, 1715,

1725, 1735, 1745

SYLVANIA 1875

TANDBERG 1885

TASHIKO 1525

TCM 1985, 2015

TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,

1365, 1375, 1395,

1435, 1465, 1475

TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,

1075, 1625

TELEFUNKEN 1005

THETA DIGITAL 1865

THOMSON 1005

TOSHIBA 0755, 0765

VECTOR RESEARCH

0555, 0865

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,

0345, 0615, 0655,

0815, 0835, 0895,

1815

CD RECORDER/CD-RW

HITACHI 0304

JVC 0334

MARANTZ 0314, 0324

PHILIPS 0274

PIONEER 0284, 0294

YAMAHA 0244

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0214

PIONEER 0254

SHARP 0264

SONY 0224

YAMAHA 0024, 0224, 0234,

0344

TAPE DECK

AKAI 0124

DENON 0204

GRUNDIG 0134

HARMAN 0044

JVC 0194

KENWOOD 0164

KORTING 0134

LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,

0084

MARANTZ 0134, 0144

NAD 0174

ONKYO 0184

PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154

PIONEER 0034, 0114

SONY 0094, 0104

YAMAHA 0004, 0014

0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 03.1.16, 2:03 PM6

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

WA72760

RX-V540RDS

OWNER’S MANUAL

MODE D’EMPLOI

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

BRUKSANVISNING

MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING

RX-V540RDS

AV Receiver

Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo

0100RX-V540_cv_GB.p65 1/20/03, 3:12 PM1

Documenttranscriptie

GB RX-V540RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100RX-V540_cv_GB.p65 1 RX-V540RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia WA72760 1/20/03, 3:12 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101RX-V540_Cau_EN-GB.p65 2 03.1.16, 11:36 AM CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................... 9 BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS ............................. 19 Using the basic menu .............................................. 19 Setting the unit to match your speaker system ........ 21 Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) ............. 21 BASIC OPERATION Set menu list ............................................................ 40 Adjusting the items on the set menu ....................... 40 SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............................................................................. 41 SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) ........ 43 SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL .......................................... 43 SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ................. 43 SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) .................................... 44 SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) .................................... 44 INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .. 44 INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) ........ 45 OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET ...................................... 45 OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ......... 45 OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE ..................................... 45 OPTION 4 ZONE SET ........................................... 46 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 47 BASIC OPERATION Before connecting components ................................. 9 Connecting video components ................................ 10 Connecting audio components ................................ 12 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 13 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 14 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 15 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18 Turning on the power .............................................. 18 SET MENU ........................................................... 40 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION INTRODUCTION Control area ............................................................. 47 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 48 Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 48 Controlling other components ................................. 49 SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS ................ 50 Adjusting the volume during playback ................... 50 Using the test tone ................................................... 50 Input modes and indications .................................... 24 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 25 DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ............................................................................ 28 Understanding sound fields ..................................... 28 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 28 ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION PLAYBACK .......................................................... 22 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING .......................................................... 51 Changing parameter settings ................................... 51 Digital sound field parameter descriptions .............. 52 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................... 53 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 57 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 59 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 29 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 29 CINEMA-DSP Programs ........................................ 29 Sound field effects ................................................... 31 TUNING ................................................................ 32 Presetting stations .................................................... 33 Selecting a preset station ......................................... 35 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 36 Description of RDS data ......................................... 36 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 36 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 37 EON function .......................................................... 37 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 38 RECORDING ....................................................... 39 English 1 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 1 03.1.16, 11:37 AM FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 80 W + 80 W Center: 80 W Rear: 80 W + 80 W Rear center: 80 W [Other models] Main: 70 W + 70 W Center: 70 W Rear: 70 W + 70 W Rear center: 70 W Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 Decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) Other features ◆ 96 kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ Set menu for optimizing this unit for your Audio/ Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Video Conversion (Composite Video ⇔ S Video) ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ◆ Zone B capability ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater System, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 2 03.1.16, 11:37 AM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories After unpacking, check that the following parts are contained. Remote control Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP VCR + TV VOL + + TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) MUTE ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN REC (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) AUDIO DISC SKIP Installing batteries in the remote control Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 2 1 3 Press the part marked with a and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four batteries supplied (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. English 1 ■ Notes on batteries 3 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 3 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 90 q VOLUME INPUT RDS MODE/FREQ STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EON EDIT EDIT PTY SEEK MODE START TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES w e t r RDS MODE/FREQ y u i o L AUDIO R p EON PTY SEEK MODE START as df (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns the unit on, or sets it in standby mode. When you turn the unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before it can reproduce sound. Standby mode In this mode, the unit uses a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 5 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 6 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of the unit. 7 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. 2 INPUT MODE Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) received when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. You cannot set priority for an audio source if you have selected 6CH INPUT as the input source. 8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. 3 INPUT Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 9 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 4 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This selection takes priority over sources selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in memory. q VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 4 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 4 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS w SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you to enjoy DSP effects when listening with headphones. When you connect headphones to the headphone jack, no signals are output to the speakers. r STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When you select STEREO, the unit mixes down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effects, to the main left and right speakers. t PROGRAM l / h Select the DSP program. y A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E when the unit is in tuner mode. a RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station, to cycle the display mode among PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or frequency display mode in turn. INTRODUCTION e SPEAKERS A/B Turns the set of main speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on or off. (U.K. and Europe models only) s PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. d PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. f EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. NEXT Selects the set menu mode when the unit is not in tuner mode. u PRESET/TUNING l / h Select preset station numbers 1 to 8 when a colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display. Select the tuning frequency when a colon (:) is not displayed when the unit is in tuner mode. SET MENU –/+ Adjust settings on the set menu when the unit is not in tuner mode. i CONTROL Switches between Bass (low-frequency response) control mode and Treble (high-frequency response) control mode. o BASS/TREBLE –/+ Increase or decrease low/high-frequency response when the unit is in Bass/Treble control mode. The sound changes 2dB each time you press one of these buttons. Control range: –10 to +10dB p VIDEO AUX jacks Inputs for audio and video signals from a portable external source (game console, etc.). Set the input source to V-AUX to select source signals from these jacks. English 5 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 5 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the remote control controls and their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT 8 2 CODE SET Used to set up manufacturer codes (see page 48). 9 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. POWER 0 q 3 w AMP VCR e r + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT t y MUTE 4 ENTERTAINMENT 4 HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 5 TITLE 6 – PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT + TEST 7 DISPLAY RETURN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 4 DSP program Select DSP programs when the remote control is in AMP mode. Press one of these buttons repeatedly to select a DSP program within a program group. 5 LEVEL Selects the effect speaker channel to adjust. 6 Multi control section Used to change and implement settings. 7 TEST Outputs a test tone for use when adjusting the speaker levels. MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 EFFECT LEVEL 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. u i o p 8 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 9 STANDBY Sets this unit in standby mode. 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of the unit. q SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. w 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. e AMP Switches the function of the same controls between AMP and the component selected using the input selector buttons. r ★/★★ Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. t VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 6 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 6 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES i STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When you select STEREO the unit mixes down all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) as well as those 2-channel signals without effect sounds, to the main left and right speakers. 30° 30° L AUDIO R Approximately 6 m (20 feet) INTRODUCTION u 6.1/5.1 Switches the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder on or off. ■ Using the remote control o NIGHT Sets the unit in night listening mode. p SET MENU Selects the set menu mode. The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. English 7 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 7 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 3 4 VCR ES MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL DIGITAL SILENT EX PCM PL PL V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R 7 TUNER ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 9 0 q w e 8 CD MUTE VOLUME PS PTY RT CT STEREO AUTO SLEEP EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY NIGHT HiFi DSP SP AB 6 5 r t dB y u i o s L C R ft LFE RL RC RR p a (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Processor indicators The indicators for the various decoders light up when the decoders are in use. e HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a Hi-Fi DSP sound field program. 2 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when using Virtual CINEMA DSP. r CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 3 Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected to the headphone jack. 4 Input source indicator Highlights the current input source with a cursor. 5 Sound field indicator Displays the sound field management the unit is using when you listen to a DSP sound field program. 6 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 8 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. 9 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 0 SILENT indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and the digital sound field processor is on. q SP A B indicator Lights up to indicate which set of main speakers is selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. t Multi-information display Shows the current DSP program name and other information when you are adjusting or changing settings. y STEREO indicator Lights up when the unit is receiving a strong signal from a FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. u TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned to a radio station. i MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored in memory. o SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. p LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. a Input channel indicator The indicators for the appropriate sound channels light up when a digital signal from a source is played back. s RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. w NIGHT indicator Lights up when the unit is set to night listening mode. 8 0102RX-V540_01-08_EN-GB.P65 8 03.1.16, 11:37 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. Use digital connections if you wish to enjoy the multi-channel sound track of DVD material, etc. with DSP effects. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96 kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard this unit may not function properly. PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component you wish to connect to this unit. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The jack names correspond to the names on the input selector. This jack is reserved for factory use. Do not connect any equipment to this jack. DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 9 – 12) Audio component jacks (page 12) Video component jacks (pages 10 – 11) Speaker terminals (page 17) COMPORNENT VIDEO PR AUDIO R DIGITAL INPUT AUDIO L R L VIDEO D-TV /CBL B DVD CD IN (PLAY) Y S VIDEO 5 CD PB DVD A VIDEO MONITOR OUT D-TV /CBL MD /CD-R COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR 3 DVD MD/CD-R 2 R MAIN SURROUND DIGITAL OUTPUT SPEAKERS R REAR (SURROUND) L A S VIDEO 75Ω UNBAL. 1 L GND VIDEO MD/CD-R OPTICAL MAIN AM ANT OUT SUB WOOFER CENTER B FM ANT SUB WOOFER MONITOR OUT CENTER 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT jacks (page 14) DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 12) REAR CENTER OUTPUT Antenna input terminals (page 13) AC OUTLETS (page 18) SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 17) English 9 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 9 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks S VIDEO PR PB Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note • If you connect this unit with a source component using Component video jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using Component video jacks. COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO ■ Connecting a video monitor Y ■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable TV 1 2 3 1 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. y 2 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achieves high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit color difference (PB, PR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. Use the commercially available cable type specified for connecting each jack. y • You can designate the input for the COMPONENT VIDEO A and B jacks to suit your components by using “INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGNMENT” on the set menu. • Signals received through the S VIDEO input jacks can be converted to composite signals in this unit and output through its VIDEO MONITOR OUT as well. • (With the exception of China and General models) Signals received through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output through the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack by setting “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” on the set menu to ON. • When the unit receives signals through both S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. Signal flow inside this unit Input • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from the AUDIO jacks. ■ Connecting a recording component Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks on this unit. Then connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks on this unit. Then connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. Note • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “V CONV.” in “OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET” is set to ON on the set menu. 10 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 10 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS OPTICAL OUTPUT O L R DVD player AUDIO OUTPUT O TV/digital TV/ cable TV OPTICAL OUTPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT PREPARATION COMPORNENT VIDEO PR AUDIO AUDIO R DIGITAL INPUT CD R L L VIDEO CD DVD IN (PLAY) D-TV /CBL PB Y DVD A VIDEO S VIDEO D-TV /CBL B 5 MONITOR OUT MD /CD-R COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL OUT (REC) 4 TUNER IN VCR R DVD 3 MAIN MD/CD-R 2 SURROUND GND A VIDEO S VIDEO 75Ω UNBAL. MD/CD-R OPTICAL MA AM ANT OUT SUB WOOFER 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT 6CH INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT FM ANT SUB WOOFER CENTER B MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L R AUDIO INPUT L R VIDEO OUTPUT VCR VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT Video monitor indicates audio signal direction L indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables indicates video signal direction English 11 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 11 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS y Connecting audio components • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack on this unit. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. The DIGITAL OUTPUT jack only outputs digital signals, while the OUT (REC) jacks output analog signals only. y • Use the AUDIO jacks on this unit for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ CD-R jack on this unit for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/ CD-R jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. COMPORNENT VID PR AUDIO R COAXIAL OUTPUT CD player DIGITAL INPUT CD AUDIO L R DVD A VIDEO L VIDEO CD DVD IN (PLAY) D-TV /CBL S VIDEO D-TV /CBL B 5 C MONITOR OUT MD /CD-R COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR DVD OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R 3 2 MAIN AM ANT OUT GND SURROUND O VIDEO S VIDEO 75Ω UNBAL. CD recorder or MD recorder O OPTICAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT SUB WOOFER CENTER 6CH INPUT SUB WOOFER FM ANT MONITOR OUT OUTPUT indicates signal direction C O indicates coaxial cables indicates optical cables 12 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 12 03.1.16, 11:38 AM PB CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) PREPARATION TUNER AM ANT GND 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 1 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) 2 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) Unit: 6 (1/14) mm (inch) Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. 3 Lead wire FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models only) FM/AM Because the inter-station frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. 100kHz/10kHz FREQUENCY STEP 4 Clamp with pliers. 5 Clamp with pliers. Snap the cover into place. English Insert the wire into the slot. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 13 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 13 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a component equipped with a multi-channel decoder and 6 channel output jacks such as a DVD/SACD player. VCR MAIN OUT SURROUND VIDEO SUB WOOFER CENTER 6CH INPUT SUB WOOFER S VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L CENTER L R R SURROUND SUBWOOFER MAIN DVD/SACD player Note • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, the unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot use DSP programs. 14 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 14 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the speakers ■ Speakers This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 6-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers, a center speaker, and a rear center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. Main speaker (R) Center speaker Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear center speaker Rear speaker (L) Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. PREPARATION The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). The rear center speaker supplements the rear (left and right) speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back transitions. ■ Speaker placement Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. Rear center speaker Place the rear center speaker in the center between the rear left and right speakers at the same height from the floor as the rear speakers. Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. However, it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Note • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear, center and/or rear center), change the settings of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” items at the set menu to direct signals to other terminals you have connected speakers to. CAUTION Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers still create interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. English 15 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 15 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) in accordance with the markers on this unit, the speakers, and the speaker cables. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/ or the speakers. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 4 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 4 Unscrew the knob. 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 5 Banana plug Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. y (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) • You can also use banana plug connectors. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. (With the exception of U.K. and Europe models) ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. (General model) Switch position Speaker Impedance level Main If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω/8 Ω or higher. Left Center, Rear Center, Rear Main* IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON MAIN A OR B : A+B : CENTER : REAR CENTER : REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Right Center, Rear Center, Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one/two set(s) of main speakers, the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω/16 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. * [Canada model only] When the switch is set to right, you cannot use “A+B”. IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch 16 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 16 03.1.16, 11:38 AM CONNECTIONS Main A speaker Right Left 1 Rear speaker Right Left 2 3 4 COMPORNENT VIDEO PR AUDIO R R VIDEO L VIDEO 5 IN (PLAY) Y D-TV /CBL B DVD CD PB S VIDEO MONITOR OUT D-TV /CBL MD /CD-R COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL 4 OUT (REC) TUNER IN VCR DVD MD/CD-R 3 2 R MAIN DIGITAL OUTPUT L SPEAKERS R REAR (SURROUND) L IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON GND SURROUND A SUB WOOFER CENTER MAIN A OR B : A+B : CENTER : REAR CENTER : REAR : S VIDEO B 75Ω UNBAL. 1 MAIN AM ANT OUT VIDEO MD/CD-R OPTICAL PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT CD AUDIO L DVD A MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER FM ANT SUB WOOFER MONITOR OUT CENTER 6CH INPUT 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER OUTPUT 6 5 Subwoofer system Right Left Main B speaker MAIN SPEAKERS terminals You can connect up to two speaker systems to these terminals. When using only one speaker system, connect it to either of the MAIN A or the MAIN B terminals. Center speaker 6 7 Rear center speaker 1 5 2 REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. REAR CENTER SPEAKER terminals A rear center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 3 7 4 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. SUBWOOFER jack When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. This unit will direct low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. Notes 17 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 17 03.1.16, 11:38 AM English • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, allocate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” item “1E BASS” on the set menu to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. You can also adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS” on page 50). CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cords Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 1 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM VOLTAGE SELECTOR INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT AC OUTLETS SWITCHED VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU BASS/TREBLE CONTROL B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO R IMPEDANCE SELECTOR SET BEFORE POWER ON L MAIN A OR B : A+B : CENTER : REAR CENTER : REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN A OR B : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER A+B : 16ΩMIN. /SPEAKER CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR CENTER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT REAR CENTER POWER AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT (General model) 1 – MUTE ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to a wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ......................................................... 100 W 1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 18 0103RX-V540_09-18_EN-GB.p65 18 Remote control 03.1.16, 11:38 AM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS The “BASIC” menu allows you to set some of the basic “SOUND” menu parameters with a minimum of effort. If you wish to configure the unit more precisely to suit your listening environment, use the more detailed parameters from the “SOUND” menu instead of those under the “BASIC” menu (See page 41). Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all parameters in the “SOUND” menu. 4 Using the basic menu AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 1 SP LEVEL Adjusts the output levels of the speakers. Refer to “Setting speaker output levels” for more information. MUTE /DTS SUR. 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT 2 4,7 5 6 Press j / i to enter the desired setting mode. 7 Press u / d to exit from the set menu. The front panel display changes in the following order: TEST DISPLAY RETURN 3,5 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU. “BASIC MENU” appears on the front panel display, as shown here. AMP SET MENU BASIC MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E If the front panel display changes to show anything other than “BASIC MENU”, press u until it displays “BASIC MENU”. 3 PREPARATION SETUP Changes the speaker and amplifier settings to suit the size of the room you are using. Refer to “Setting the unit to match your speaker system” for more information. Use the remote control to make adjustments. • Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select the main speakers you want to use. • Make sure you disconnect headphones from this unit. VCR Press u / d to change the display to the setting you want to alter. PRESET/CH – SELECT + Press j / i to enter into the BASIC menu. The front panel display changes as shown here: Change the unit settings to suit your listening environment. When you have finished, the unit will automatically return to the basic menu. Exit PRESET/CH – SELECT + ↑ BASIC ↓↑ SOUND ↓↑ INPUT ↓↑ OPTION ↓ Exit PRESET/CH – SELECT 1 SETUP + English 19 0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 19 03.1.16, 11:39 AM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS SET MENU BASIC SOUND INPUT OPTION 1 SETUP 2 SP LEVEL Press j / i to alter the settings for each parameter. Use d to move to the next setting. Press j / i to adjust the balance between each speaker and the left main speaker. Use d to move to the next setting. 1 ROOM 1 L-R Choose from S/M/L. Adjust the balance between the main left and right speakers. 2 SUBWOOFER 2C Choose either of YES/NONE. Adjust the balance between the main left and center speakers. 3 SPEAKERS 3 RL Choose from 2/3/4/5/6 spk. Adjust the balance between the main left and rear left speakers. CANCEL 4 SET/CANCEL 4 RC Choose either of SET/CANCEL. SET YES Adjust the balance between the rear left and rear center speakers. NO 5 CHECK OK: 5 RR Choose either of YES/NO. Adjust the balance between the rear left and rear right speakers. 6 SWFR Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and the subwoofer. • After altering the “1 SETUP” parameters, readjust the output levels of the speakers at “2 SP LEVEL”. • See pages 40 – 46 for a detailed explanation of the “SOUND”, “INPUT” and “OPTION” menus. 20 0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 20 03.1.16, 11:39 AM BASIC SYSTEM SETTINGS Setting the unit to match your speaker system Follow the instructions below to set the amplifier output to match the size of your room and speakers. Press u / d to cycle through parameters 1 through 4, and j / i to alter the parameter setting. Factory default settings are highlighted. [U.S.A. and Canada models] S: 16ft. x 3ft., 200sq.ft. (4.8 x 4m, 20m2) M: 20ft. x 16ft., 300sq.ft. (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L: 26ft. x 19ft., 450sq.ft. (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) If the volume of the test tone varies between speakers, press j / i to change the display to “NO”. The unit will automatically enter the “2 SP LEVEL” mode. If the test tone is output at the same volume from all of the speakers, select “CHECK OK: YES”. The unit will exit from the SETUP menu. Notes • The unit cycles the test tone around each of the speakers in turn twice. • The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front panel display. [Other models] S: 3.6m x 2.8m, 10m2 M: 4.8m x 4.0m, 20m2 L: 6.3m x 5.0m, 30m2 2 SUBWOOFER Settings: YES, NONE Select YES if you have a subwoofer in your system, or NONE if you do not. 3 SPEAKERS Settings: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (spk) Select the number of speakers you wish to use in your speaker configuration. This number does not include your subwoofer. Setting 5 Use the test tone to check the speaker levels. When you select SET in 4, the display changes to “CHECK: TestTone”, and the unit outputs a test tone to each of the speakers in turn. When the test tone begins, the display changes to “CHECK OK: YES”. Speaker Display Use this menu to compare and adjust the test tone output from each speaker to the output from the left main (or left rear) speaker so that the volume level for all speakers is identical. Press u / d to select a speaker, then adjust the balance using j / i. Note • The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker and the left main (or left rear) speaker in turn. The indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone flashes on the front panel display. L 3spk L C R Main L/Center/Main R 1 L-R Adjusts the balance between the main left and right speakers. 4spk L R RL RR Main L/Main R/Rear L/ Rear R 2 C Adjusts the balance between the main left and center speakers. Main L/Center/Main R/ Rear L/Rear R 3 RL Adjusts the balance between the main left and rear left speakers. Main L/Center/Main R/ Rear L/Rear Center/Rear R 4 RC Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear center speakers. 5spk L C R RL 6spk RR L C R RL RC RR Main L/Main R Setting speaker output levels (SP LEVEL) 2spk R 6 SWFR Adjust the balance between the main left speaker and the subwoofer. 21 21 03.1.16, 11:39 AM English 5 RR Adjusts the balance between the rear left and rear right speakers. 0104RX-V540_19-21_EN-GB.p65 PREPARATION 1 ROOM Settings: S, M, L Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: 4 SET or CANCEL Select SET to confirm the changes you made to the above three settings. The unit will output a test tone to the speakers (see 5). Alternatively, select CANCEL to exit this menu without altering any of the unit settings. PLAYBACK 1 44 4 6 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON Rotate the INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY INPUT AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO or 3 CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR VCR2/DVR A R 6 7 Front panel Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT 4 1 + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT 1 DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME AUTO L R To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks • Select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting an audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. MUTE 7 D-TV/CBL Selected input source 6 TV MUTE V-AUX DVD 4 AMP VCR VCR SP A Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 3 Front panel or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B to select the main speakers you want to use. If you are using two sets of main speakers, press both A and B. SPEAKERS A B Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT so that “6CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. 22 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 Remote control 22 03.1.16, 11:39 AM PLAYBACK 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. VOLUME ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to view images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while watching beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. + CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR VCR2/DVR A VOLUME or – ■ To mute the sound Front panel Front panel ■ Night listening mode Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback from other components, try turning the recording component on. Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 28 – 30 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Front panel y • You can change the amount by which the unit reduces the volume in “OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE” in the set menu. • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc. • During muting, the MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. BASS/TREBLE CONTROL MUTE BASIC OPERATION If desired, use CONTROL and BASS/TREBLE –/+. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. 7 Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume audio output, press MUTE again. Remote control Remote control This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low volumes or at night. Press NIGHT on the remote control. Press NIGHT once more to return to normal reproduction. NIGHT 0 Note • Setting the unit in standby mode cancels night listening mode. y • You can use night listening mode with any of the sound field programs. • The NIGHT indicator on the front panel display lights when the unit is in night listening mode. • Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ■ When you have finished using this unit Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in standby mode. STANDBY or STANDBY /ON English Front panel Remote control 23 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 23 03.1.16, 11:39 AM PLAYBACK ■ Notes on digital signals Input modes and indications This unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you wish to use. Each time you turn on the unit power, the input mode is set to the “INPUT 2 INPUT MODE” setting defined in the set menu. Press INPUT MODE repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. INPUT MODE Front panel VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only digital input signals encoded with DTS are selected, even if the unit is receiving another signal simultaneously. ANALOG: In this mode, only analog input signals are selected, even the unit is receiving digital signals at the same time. Notes • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If it detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, there is a delay in sound output for a moment when playback resumes after a search, because the unit must select the digital signal again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the unit may not output any sound for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96 kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to this unit: • You cannot use any DSP programs. • The unit will output sound as 2-channel stereo from the main left and right speakers only. Therefore, you cannot adjust the level of the effect speakers while listening to such a source. ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, the unit may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if there is a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, the unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack on this unit and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, the unit does not output any sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – The unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after detecting the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, the unit can only reproduce DTS source. If you want to play a normal PCM source immediately, change the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this state continues for longer than 30 seconds, the unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. 24 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 24 03.1.16, 11:39 AM PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 28 – 30. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to cycle through sub-programs if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 2 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Adventure” and “General”. VOLUME HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 5 6CH INPUT /DTS SUR. VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT 9 VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER R EFFECT PROGRAM l / h VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R General TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT + + TV CH VOLUME – 1 • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • You cannot use the digital sound field processor with a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit or when the unit is reproducing a digital source with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in standby mode, it stores the current source and DSP program in memory and automatically selects them when you turn on the power again. • If the unit receives a Dolby Digital or DTS signal when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When the unit is reproducing a monaural source with PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC II Movie, no sound is output from the main and rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the set menu is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 2,3 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER EFFECT 1 Press AMP. 2 Press one of the numeric buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 RR MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL TV INPUT L C R LFE RL Notes AMP – CD POWER VCR 1 TV MUTE TUNER VOLUME SP A y VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A Adventure L C R LFE RL RR • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. English 25 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 25 03.1.16, 11:39 AM PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or Neo:6 You can listen to 2-channel sources decoded into five or six discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II or Neo:6 in program No. 9. The display cycles as follows each time you press q/ DTS SUR : PRO LOGIC→PRO LOGIC Enhanced→PRO LOGIC II Movie→PRO LOGIC II Music→Neo:6 Cinema→Neo:6 Music→PRO LOGIC→.... y • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Enhanced, PRO LOGIC II Movie, PRO LOGIC II Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and Neo:6 Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU BASS/TREBLE CONTROL B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO ■ Playing Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES material R Press 6.1/5.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder to listen to Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES material with a rear center speaker. PROGRAM l / h 6.1/5.1 +10 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER AMP VCR (Example) 2 ES + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MATRIX HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER 9 EFFECT 3 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER EFFECT CD VOLUME Matrix 6.1 MUTE /DTS SUR. VCR SP A L C R LFE RL RR Press 6.1/5.1 to choose the playback mode. (The modes you can select vary depending on the format of the material you are playing.) AUTO: This mode automatically switches to Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES Matrix 6.1/DTS ES Discrete 6.1 depending on the signal in the input source that the unit detects. The rear center speaker does not output sound for 5.1 channel sources. Discrete 6.1: This mode can only be selected only when the unit detects a source encoded with the DTS ES Discrete format. (The DISCRETE indicator lights up.) Matrix 6.1: This mode allows for 6-channel playback of the input source through the Matrix 6.1 EX or MATRIX decoder. (Either indicator lights up.) OFF: The rear center speaker does not output sound in this mode. Notes VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PL TUNER CD VOLUME SP A PRO LOGIC L R • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) that this unit can automatically detect. Select “Matrix 6.1” to play these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel sound. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press 6.1/5.1 in the following cases: 1 When “1C REAR LR” is set to NON. 2 When effects are turned off. 3 When the source connected to the 6CH INPUT jack is being played. 4 When the unit is reproducing a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source. 5 When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The input mode resets to AUTO when you turn the unit power off. 26 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 26 03.1.16, 11:39 AM PLAYBACK ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the set menu to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 6ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL, Pro Logic, Pro Logic II, or DTS program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers, or rear center speaker. • If you turn off the sound effects while the unit is reproducing sound from a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the unit will output mix the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels and output them from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)” on the set menu to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. y • During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 2 Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. PRESET/CH – SELECT + BASIC OPERATION You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expect from actual speakers through headphones, with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, the unit reproduces the source in normal stereo.) Notes Notes • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or the unit is receiving a digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. • The sound from the LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphones. ■ Normal stereo reproduction Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO/EFFECT again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or ENTER EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control (Format): The display shows the signal format. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. in: The display shows the number of input signal source channels, as follows: For multi-channel soundtrack such as front 3 channels, rear 2 channels and LFE, the display shows “3/2/ LFE”. For bilingual broadcasts where the signal is split into 2 channels, the display shows “1+1”. For signals with more than 3 channels the display shows “MLT”. fs: The display shows the sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” shows in the front panel display. rate: The display shows the bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” shows in the front panel display. flg: The display shows the flag - data encoded in a DTS or Dolby Digital signal that causes this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate decoder for playback. English 27 0105RX-V540_22-27_EN-GB.p65 27 03.1.16, 11:39 AM DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) Understanding sound fields A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. ■ Recreating a sound field Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires four effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the four effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. Hi-Fi DSP programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. No. Program Features 1 CONCERT HALL A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 6ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. 28 0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 28 03.1.16, 11:40 AM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT BASIC OPERATION PRESENCE SOUND FIELD MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic II decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder for adding a rear center channel. You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. CINEMA-DSP Programs The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Program Features ENTERTAINMENT/ Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 5 MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. 6 TV THEATER/ Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. TV THEATER/Variety/ Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. 29 0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 29 03.1.16, 11:40 AM English 4 CINEMA-DSP ■ For movie programs No. 7 8 9 Program MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 Features Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Straight Decode The built-in decoder reproduces source sounds and sound-effects precisely. No DSP effect is applied in this program. Enhanced Mode This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. Straight Decode This unit is equipped with various precise decoders; • Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel reproduction of the original sound • Dolby Digital EX/DTS ES decoder for an additional rear center channel • Dolby Pro Logic/Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 decoder for multi-channel reproduction of 2-channel sources Select any of the Straight Decode modes in Program 9 (except for the sub-program “Enhanced”) to use any of these decoders for reproducing the original sound without any sound effects added. In this case, no DSP effect is applied and the DSP indicator turns off. Note • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the main and rear speakers output effect sounds. 30 0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 30 03.1.16, 11:40 AM CINEMA-DSP Sound field effects The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Presence DSP sound field Left surround DSP sound field These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Right surround DSP sound field These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the rear center channel. ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Presence DSP sound field Most movie material has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. BASIC OPERATION ■ Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Pro Logic II/DTS Neo:6 This unit comes with Dolby Pro Logic II and DTS Neo:6 decoders which decode 2-channel Dolby Surround data into five or six full range channels. Both decoders have two modes, MOVIE/CINEMA for movies, and MUSIC for 2channel sources. English 31 0106RX-V540_28-31_EN-GB.p65 31 03.1.16, 11:40 AM TUNING There are 2 methods of tuning; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. 4 ■ Automatic tuning 1 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING 3 3 2 SET MENU VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B VCR EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A A TUNED AUTO AM 1530 kHz When the unit is tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the station received is shown on the front panel display. 4 1 TUNER R Rotate the INPUT selector (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you are trying to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. INPUT or Front panel 2 CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR VCR2/DVR A 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) until the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display. Remote control Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MANUAL MONO Disappears FM/AM or If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R A TUNER TUNED AM 1440 kHz Lights up 3 If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR SP A PRESET/TUNING EDIT V-AUX SP A EDIT AUTO AUTO/MANUAL MONO VCR PRESET/TUNING A V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED AUTO Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING SET MENU AM 1440 kHz Note • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. 32 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 32 03.1.16, 11:40 AM TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables the unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset number. 2 13 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES AUDIO R Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) until the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. Lights up AUTO/MANUAL MONO 3 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. BASIC OPERATION 1 L • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure described in “Manually presetting stations”. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for at least 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning starts, beginning at the frequency currently displayed and moving toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN`L/AUTO FM VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM 89.9 MHz When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 33 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 33 03.1.16, 11:40 AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. 4 2,5 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING VOLUME INPUT SET MENU PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO R VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER TUNED MEMORY C3:AM 1440 kHz 3 4 Preset number 1 Tune in to a station. See page 32 for tuning instructions. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A A 5 TUNER TUNED AM 1440 kHz Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear on the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. When tuned to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 MEMORY MAN`L/AUTO FM Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY VCR MEMORY Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) is showing on the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL SP A DVD MD/CD-R D-TV/CBL 6 TUNER TUNED Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. TUNER TUNED MEMORY Preset group 34 34 MD/CD-R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. C :AM 1440 kHz 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 DVD C3:AM 1440 kHz Flashes 3 V-AUX SP A MAN`L/AUTO FM 03.1.16, 11:40 AM TUNING ■ Exchanging preset stations Selecting a preset station You can recall any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. 2,4 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON VOLUME EDIT INPUT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM PRESET/TUNING FM/AM INPUT MODE STANDBY /ON 6CH INPUT EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM BASS/TREBLE CONTROL B INPUT MODE EFFECT 6CH INPUT SET MENU NEXT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO R VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO R 1 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN 1,3 1,3 1 2 Select preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for at least 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. AUDIO DISC SKIP 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. A/B/C/D/E VCR PRESET/TUNING SET MENU D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED MEMORY E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT MENU or NEXT A/B/C/D/E 3 Front panel 2 V-AUX SP A BASIC OPERATION 1 REC Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band and frequency, and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. – or SELECT VCR + V-AUX D-TV/CBL TUNER TUNED MEMORY Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. VCR PRESET/TUNING Remote control MD/CD-R A5:FM 90.6 MHz SET MENU Front panel DVD SP A 4 PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING Select preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. EDIT V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A EDIT TUNER MEMORY E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL SP A DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED C3:AM 1440 kHz English 35 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 35 03.1.16, 11:40 AM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. RDS data contains a variety of information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), and others. Description of RDS data This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when tuned to stations broadcasting RDS. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: Changing the RDS mode This unit provides four modes for displaying RDS data. The PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the front panel display when an RDS station is being received. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to cycle the display through the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. There are 15 program types used to classify RDS stations. RDS MODE/FREQ EON PS mode News NEWS AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed using a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Any other characters used in RT data are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. “CT WAIT” may appear if the data is accidentally cut off. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): Refer to the following page. PTY mode RT mode CT mode RDS mode OFF Notes • Do not press RDS MODE/FREQ when an RDS station is being received until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the front panel display. You cannot change the mode if you press this button prior to this. This is because this unit has not finished receiving all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • This unit cannot utilize the RDS data service if the signal received is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • Sometimes, RDS data cannot be received in poor reception conditions. If this is the case, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display. Although this will change the reception mode to monoaural, RDS data may be displayed when you change the display to RDS mode. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. 36 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 36 03.1.16, 11:40 AM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS PTY SEEK function EON function If you select the desired program type, the unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set the unit in PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station the unit is currently receiving , or “NEWS” flashes on the front panel display. This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), the unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. Note • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When the unit is tuned to such a station, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. PTY SEEK MODE START Flashes 2 Check that the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears on the front panel display. SET MENU Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display while the unit is searching for stations. PTY SEEK MODE START PTY HOLD Lights up • The unit will stop searching if a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found. • If the station found is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. The unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. BASIC OPERATION PRESET/TUNING 3 1 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. EON • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, the unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the unit returns to the previous station (or another program on the same station). ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until the program type name disappears from the front panel display. ■ To cancel this function Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. English 37 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 37 03.1.16, 11:40 AM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. SLEEP y • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y ■ Setting the sleep timer • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER 2 AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT – MUTE 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR SP A V-AUX D-TV/CBL MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP HiFi DSP SLEEP 3 DVD SLEEP 120min VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR SP A V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP HiFi DSP ROCK CONCERT VOLUME L R 38 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 38 03.1.16, 11:40 AM RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed on other recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components for details on their operation . 2 VOLUME INPUT PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STANDBY /ON EDIT TUNING MODE MEMORY AUTO/MANUAL MONO MAN`L/AUTO FM INPUT MODE 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUX SILENT SPEAKERS A STEREO PROGRAM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING NEXT SET MENU CONTROL BASS/TREBLE B EFFECT VIDEO PHONES L AUDIO R TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. MUTE 1 2 • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to it. • DSP programs and volume, bass, and treble settings do not affect the recorded material. • You cannot record from a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit. • Input sources are not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to VCR OUT.) • This unit’s DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT(REC) jacks are independent. To record a source using a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, connect the source component to one of the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. • Check the copyright laws in your country if you wish to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS material Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX or VCR Front panel BASIC OPERATION 2 STANDBY POWER Notes The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, follow the operating instructions of your player to set it to output an analog signal, if it is compatible with the DTS format. Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. English 39 0107RX-V540_32-39_EN-GB.P65 39 03.1.16, 11:40 AM SET MENU You can set the following parameters on the set menu to obtain a better sound from the unit. Change the settings to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Set menu list Adjusting the items on the set menu Use the remote control to make adjustments. The set menus are divided by use and function into the 4 categories listed here. AMP VCR ■ BASIC + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE The BASIC area contains the basic parameters that you must set before using this unit. It consists of the following menus. See pages 19 – 21 for a detailed explanation. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER 2 3,5,8 EFFECT 1 SETUP LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E 2 SP LEVEL (Speaker level) – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN 4,6,7 ■ SOUND The SOUND area contains parameters for altering sound output. It consists of the following menus that you can use to alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system. 1 SPEAKER SET 2 SP DISTANCE (Speaker distance) 3 LFE LEVEL (Low frequency effect level) 4 D. RANGE (Dynamic range) 5 CENTER GEQ (Center graphic equalizer) 6 HP TONE CTRL (Headphone tone control) y • You can change set menu parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. • You can use NEXT and SET MENU +/– on the front panel to change these settings, if the unit is not set to TUNER mode. Press NEXT to select the category or field you wish to change, and SET MENU +/– to change the parameters. Note • You cannot change some set menu parameters while the unit is in night listening mode. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the set menu. AMP ■ INPUT The INPUT area contains parameters concerned with signal input. It consists of the following menus that you can use to change the assignment of input jacks. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 1 I/O ASSIGN 2 INPUT MODE 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the desired menu. 4 5 Press j / i to enter the selected menu. ■ OPTION This is a supplementary set up menu provided for your convenience. It consists of the following menus that you can use to change display brightness, protect existing settings, and perform other non-essential functions. Press u / d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust. 1 DISPLAY SET PRESET/CH 2 MEM. GUARD – 3 AUDIO MUTE SELECT + 4 ZONE SET • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. y • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 40 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 40 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU 6 Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. Depending on the menu item, press u/d to select a sub item. 7 8 Press j / i repeatedly to change the menu item setting. PRESET/CH – + SELECT Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. Note PRESET/CH – + SELECT – + SELECT PRESET/CH HALL SELECT + or JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 • Some menu item settings have no effect when the unit is reproducing a source with a digital signal sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz. ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) PRESET/CH Press u / d repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit from the set menu. – SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the main left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If this happens, adjust the items again. If you add a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. The BASIC and SOUND menus The “BASIC” menu allows you to easily set the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” and “SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE” parameters. It is not necessary to reset any of the parameters in the “BASIC” menu, but you can access more detailed parameters in the “SOUND” menu if you wish. Note • After altering parameters in the “SOUND” menu, if you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” and then select “SET”, the parameters from the “SOUND” menu alter in response to any changes you make in “BASIC 1 SETUP”. Do not enter the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu unless you wish to change these settings. If you accidentally enter the “BASIC 1 SETUP” menu, select “CANCEL” to return to the “BASIC” menu. (page 20) English 41 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 41 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the main left and right channel signals to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. ■ 1D REAR CT (rear center speaker mode) If you add a rear center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide more realistic frontto-back transitions. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large rear center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the rear center channel signal to the rear center speaker. SML Select this if you have a small rear center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear center channel to the speakers selected with “1E BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have a rear center speaker. The unit directs all of the rear center channel signal to the rear left and right speakers. ■ 1E BASS (bass out mode) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. In this case, the rear center speaker will automatically be set to NON and the “1D REAR CT” item will be skipped. SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The unit directs the LFE signals to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The unit directs LFE signals to the main speakers. BOTH The unit directs LFE signals to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and the subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1E BASS”, the unit directs the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. 42 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 42 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU SOUND 2 SP DISTANCE (speaker distance) Use this feature to adjust the delay applied to center and rear center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speakers with a source such as Dolby Digital or DTS. Ideally, the center speaker and the rear speakers should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right main speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker or the rear center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers or the rear speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker and the rear speakers, you can adjust the apparent distance from the center speaker and the rear speakers to the main listening position to make it seem the same as the distance between the listening position and main left and right speakers. 1 2 Press u / d to select “UNIT”. 3 Press u / d to select the speaker for which you want to adjust the delay. 4 Press j / i to set the delay. Press i for higher values and j for lower values. Press j / i to select the unit “meters” or “feet” to be used in setting. Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB 1 Press u / d to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. SOUND 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. R ADVANCED OPERATION C Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries lowfrequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) C L SOUND 3 LFE LEVEL MAX Select MAX for feature films. STD Select STD for general use. RL RC RR RR RL MIN Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. RC ■ Setting by “meters” Control range: Initial settings: 0.3 to 24.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 3.00 m (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 2.10 m (for rear center) ■ Setting by “feet” Control range: Initial settings: 1 to 80 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/R, rear center) 10.0 ft (for main L/R, center, rear L/ R), 7.0 ft (for rear center) Note English • No delay will be set if you set the same distance for the main L/R and center, or the rear L/R and rear center. 43 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 43 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU SOUND 5 CENTER GEQ (center graphic equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer so that the center speaker tonal quality matches that of the left and right main speakers. You can select the 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, or 10 kHz frequencies. Control range (dB): –6 to +6 Initial setting: 0 dB for 5-band 1 Press d to select a higher frequency and u to select a lower frequency. 2 Press j / i to adjust the level of that frequency. Note • You can monitor the center speaker sound while adjusting this parameter by using the test tone. Press TEST before starting the foregoing procedure. Once you begin this procedure, the test tone remains at the center speaker and you can hear how the sound changes as you adjust the various frequency levels. To stop the test tone, press TEST. INPUT 1 I/O ASSIGN (input/ output assignment) You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from those of the component. This lets you to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once assigned, select that component with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 1A for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks Choices: ■ 1B for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack Choices: Control range (dB): BASS .................... –6 to +3 TRBL (treble) ....... –6 to +3 Initial setting: BASS .................... 0 dB TRBL .................... 0 dB (1) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 1C for OPTICAL INPUT jacks Choices: SOUND 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you are using headphones. [A] DVD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL (2) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 1D for COAXIAL INPUT jack Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, VCR, V-AUX, D-TV/CBL, DVD Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 44 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 44 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU INPUT 2 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn this unit on (see page 24 for details about the input mode). Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on the unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST Select ON to protect the following features: • All set menu items • Center, rear speakers, rear center, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters AUTO Select this setting to allow the unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this setting to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective sources. OPTION 1 DISPLAY SET Choices: ON, OFF Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other set menu items. OPTION 3 AUDIO MUTE Adjusts the amount by which the MUTE function reduces the output volume. ■ DIMMER Use this to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: MUTE, –50dB, –20dB Control range: –4 to 0 ■ V CONV. (Video conversion) –50dB Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 50dB. –20dB Reduces the volume of the present sound output by 20dB. Choices: ON, OFF ADVANCED OPERATION (With the exception of China and General models) Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite signals to S-video signals to output through the S-video jack when the unit is receiving a video signal that is not in the S-video format. MUTE Completely halts all output of sound. ON Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video signals. OFF Select OFF to stop the conversion of composite signals to S-video signals. English 45 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 45 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SET MENU OPTION 4 ZONE SET ■ SP B (speaker B set) Use this feature to select the location of the main speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B MAIN Select this to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. ZONE B Select this if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. 46 0108RX-V540_40-46_EN-GB.p65 46 03.1.16, 11:41 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, set up the remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. TRANSMIT CODE SET ■ Controlling other component The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP TRANSMIT CODE SET ★/★★ buttons and input selector buttons Press AMP to control this unit. DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 /DTS SUR. 9 The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. ★/★★ buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * ★/★★ buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. SYSTEM 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER PRESET/CH SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT CD DVD AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – +– + TV MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL TV CH – MUTE – HALL JAZZ CLUB TV MUTE ROCK CONCERT TV INPUT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO 5 /DTS SUR. SET MENU MENU TITLE TUNER AV EFFECT LEVEL MD/CD-R TV – 8 NIGHT POWER POWER MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 STANDBY POWER 9 MOVIE TV MOVIE THEATER THEATER 1 THEATER ROCK 2 ENTERHALL JAZZ CLUB CONCERT TAINMENT 6 1 7 2 NIGHT MUSIC VIDEO 6.1/5.1 TV THEATER 0 5 +10 6 ENTER 7 4 8 EFFECT – + SELECT LEVEL TEST /DTS SUR. PRESET/CH NIGHT 9 TITLE DISPLAY RETURN 6.1/5.1 SET MENU 0 +10 MENU A/B/C/D/E – REC TEST AUDIO LEVEL SELECT PRESET/CH DISPLAY – REC A/B/C/D/E + SELECT TEST AUDIO DISC SKIP ENTER EFFECT SET MENU MENU TITLE RETURN DISC SKIP + STEREO RETURN ADVANCED OPERATION A/B/C/D/E 8 3 STEREO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Component control area You can control up to 9 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 49). English 47 0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 47 03.1.16, 11:41 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing setup manufacturer codes Setting the manufacturer code You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9 component controls. ■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the component control The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each component control. Component control (buttons) Component category (Library) CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003 DVD DVD YAMAHA 0098 D-TV/CBL – – – V-AUX – – – VCR – – – ★ – – – ★★ – – – 1 2 Manufacturer MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR ★ ★★ Press an input selector button or ★/★★ to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. Code Press an input selector button or ★/★★ to select the component you want to set up. CD 1 2 MD/CD-R TUNER D-TV/CBL V-AUX VCR ★ ★★ Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Note • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process cancels. If this happens, start over from step 1. 3 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. CD DVD Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. y • You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 48 0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 48 03.1.16, 11:41 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components if you have set the manufacturer code for your component in the remote control. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate the component correctly. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE HALL D-TV/CBL DVD V-AUX 7 AMP 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 5 6 TV VOL 4 2 TV THEATER 3 + ENTERTAINMENT 3 1 MUSIC VIDEO /DTS SUR. + ROCK CONCERT 6CH INPUT VCR 4 JAZZ CLUB MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER w EFFECT + TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 8 9 0 MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – e + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN r REC AUDIO q DVD player 1 AV POWER *1Power 2 TV POWER 2 VCR TV, digital/cable TV *1Power *3VCR power 2 CD player CD/MD recorder *1Power 2 DISC SKIP *1Power 2 2 Tuner *1Power 2 * TV power * TV power * TV power * TV power * TV power * TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV CH – *2TV channel down *2TV channel down TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down 4 TV VOL + TV VOL – 5 TV MUTE 2 2 * TV volume up * TV volume up 2 * TV volume down 2 2 * TV volume down 2 * TV mute * TV mute TV volume up TV volume down TV mute 2 2 * TV volume up 2 * TV volume up * TV volume down 2 * TV mute 2 * TV volume down 2 * TV mute *2TV volume up *2TV volume down *2TV mute * TV input * TV input TV input * TV input * TV input *2TV input 7 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) 8 TITLE 2 2 Title 9 PRESET/CH u PRESET/CH d Up VCR channel up Preset up Down VCR channel down Preset down PRESET/CH j Left PRESET/CH i Right SELECT Select 0 RETURN q REC/DISC SKIP 2 Return Disc skip Rec *3VCR rec Disc skip Play Play *3VCR play Play Play e Search backward Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward Search backward r Search forward Search forward *3VCR search forward Search forward Search forward Pause *3VCR pause w AUDIO Audio d Pause t Skip backward y Skip forward Rec (MD) Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop *3VCR stop Stop Stop Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index Display Display a w ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION 6 TV INPUT 2 e MENU r DISPLAY Menu A/B/C/D/E Display 49 0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 49 03.1.16, 11:41 AM English *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ★★. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ★★ areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR. SETTING THE SPEAKER LEVELS Adjusting the volume during playback You can adjust the volume of the speakers while listening to sound playback. Using the test tone Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. AMP VCR AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – 1 + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 TV INPUT 1 2 HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 5 6 0 +10 HALL MUTE 9 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 7 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 8 9 PRESET/CH LEVEL LEVEL ENTER SELECT PRESET/CH ENTER SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – A/B/C/D/E – MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 STEREO SET MENU MENU TITLE JAZZ CLUB EFFECT EFFECT 2 – MUTE TV MUTE /DTS SUR. 2,5 + TEST SELECT + RETURN DISPLAY 3 1 2 Press AMP. Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. The unit cycles through the speakers in the following order each time you press LEVEL: MAIN L→CENTER→MAIN R→R SUR. (rear R)→REAR CT (rear center)→L SUR. (rear L)→SWFR (subwoofer)→..... Press AMP. 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a speaker to adjust. Each time you press d, the unit will cycle through the speakers in the following order: TEST LEFT(main L)→TEST CENTER(center)→TEST RIGHT(main R)→TEST R SUR.(rear R)→TEST REAR CNTR (rear center)→TEST L SUR.(rear L)→TEST SUBWOOFER(subwoofer)→..... (Press u to cycle the speakers in the reverse order.) 4 5 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. • Pressing LEVEL once opens the level display. Press u / d at this time to select a speaker. Press j / i to adjust the speaker volume. • The center and rear speakers can be adjusted by a maximum of –10dB ~ +10dB. • The main speakers and subwoofer can be adjusted by a maximum of –20dB ~ 0dB. Notes • You cannot adjust speaker levels if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” parameter in the set menu is set to NON. • You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS” parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is set to MAIN. • If you use LEVEL to adjust speaker levels, the speaker levels you previously set with the test tone will also change. • If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any changes you make in ”BASIC 1 SETUP”. 4 1 2 y 3 3 TEST DISPLAY RETURN 1 Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone halts. Notes • You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. • You cannot adjust speaker volumes if the “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” parameter on the set menu is set to NON. • You cannot adjust the subwoofer level if the “1E BASS” parameter in “SOUND 1 SPEAKER SET” in the set menu is set to MAIN. • If you select “BASIC 1 SETUP” in the set menu and then select “SET”, speaker levels change in response to any changes you make in ”BASIC 1 SETUP”. y • Depending on the source the unit is reproducing, the speaker levels set with the test tone may not be to your liking. If this is the case, adjust the speaker levels while listening to the source. 50 0109RX-V540_47-50_EN-GB.p65 50 03.1.16, 11:41 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING 5 Changing parameter settings The initial sound field program settings will provide you with an excellent listening experience as they are. It is not necessary to alter these settings, but you can create an original listening environment by doing so. Repeat steps 2 – 4 if you wish to alter other parameters. Note • You cannot alter these parameters if the “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” parameter in the set menu is set to ON. Change this setting to OFF if you wish to alter any other parameters. Note • The editable parameters vary depending on the sound field program you select. Refer to the explanation for the parameter. AMP VCR + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 2 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE 3 A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN 4 1 Press AMP. 2 Select a sound field program. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 2 MUSIC VIDEO TV THEATER 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 3 4 MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 THEATER 2 6 7 8 NIGHT 6.1/5.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT 4 Press u / d to select the parameter you want to change. PRESET/CH – Press j / i to change the parameter setting. SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 + PRESET/CH – SELECT + English 51 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 51 03.1.16, 11:42 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM PARAMETER EDITING Digital sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB ■ DELAY Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Control range varies depending on the input source and the DSP program you use.) For 6ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ RL LEVEL (Rear left level) ■ RR LEVEL (Rear right level) ■ RC LEVEL (Rear center level) For PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center Image) Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control Range: 0 to 0.5 52 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 52 03.1.16, 11:42 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. – The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in standby mode. 16 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection is not touching anything other than its respective connection. 16 – 17 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. – Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10 – 17 No appropriate input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The main speakers have not been selected properly. Select the main speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 22 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 23 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to cancel mute and adjust the volume. – Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g; a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. – The picture does not appear. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Connect components using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 10 – 11 The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn the unit back on. 16 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn the unit back on. – The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. – The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons on the unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. – No sound. 22 16 – 17 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 53 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 53 03.1.16, 11:42 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 No sound from the effect speakers. The sound effect is switched off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. – A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. A digital signal with a sampling frequency greater than 48 kHz is input to this unit. No sound from the center speaker. – The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 50 “SOUND 1A CENTER” on the set menu is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 41 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 6ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 42 “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 42 “SOUND 1E BASS” on the set menu is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. Select MAIN. The speaker mode settings (main, center, rear, or rear center) on the set menu does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 54 50 25 – 30 – 42 54 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 25 – 30 – The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). Poor bass reproduction. 25 – 30 03.1.16, 11:42 AM 41 – 42 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound from the rear center speaker. Cause Remedy Refer to page “SOUND 1C REAR LR” or “SOUND 1D REAR CT” on the set menu is set to NON. Select LRG or SML. 42 The Dolby Digital EX or the DTS-ES decoder is not switched on. Press 6.1/5.1 on the remote control to switch the decoder on. – A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. – The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. – The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. There is no source component connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. The sound field parameters and some other settings on the unit cannot be changed. “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu is set to ON. Set “OPTION 2 MEM. GUARD” in the set menu to OFF. – The unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. – “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. The speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. – There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. – The unit suddenly turns into standby mode. The internal temperature has become too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until the unit cools down and then turn it back on. – – 10 – 12 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 55 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 55 03.1.16, 11:42 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 13 Use the manual tuning method. 32 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. – The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. – Use the manual tuning method. 32 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. The unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. 33 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. – Use the manual tuning method. 32 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 13 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. – ■ Remote control Problem Cause The remote control does not work nor function properly. Remedy Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. – The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 48 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 48 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. – 56 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 56 Refer to page 03.1.16, 11:42 AM GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ Dolby Digital ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by a specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range of channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. English 57 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 57 03.1.16, 11:42 AM GLOSSARY ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP ■ S-video signal ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 58 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 58 03.1.16, 11:42 AM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear, Rear Center [U.S.A. and Canada models] 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 80 W 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 95 W [Other models] 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 70 W 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 85 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 115 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • IEC Power [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 80 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ......................................................... 100 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 100/125/160/200 W [Other models] .................................................. 90/110/145/180 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 100 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off .................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output ........................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Usable sensitivity (IHF, Mono) ............................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ...................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................. 270 W/360 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 270 W Standby Mode ......................................................... approx. 0.8 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ..................... 435 x 161 x 390 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 15-3/8”) • Weight .............................................................. 11.0 kg (24 lbs 4 oz) *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER ............................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 30 MHz, –3 dB English 59 0110RX-V540_51-59_EN-GB.p65 59 03.1.16, 11:42 AM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 I 0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 2 03.1.16, 2:03 PM HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 KTV 0601, 1171 LENOIR 0601, 1511 LEYEO 1181 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 NECKERMANN LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 RADIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 II 0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 3 03.1.16, 2:03 PM THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366, 1586 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK) 1526 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 III 0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 4 03.1.16, 2:03 PM VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC1172 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YAMAHA 0042, 1202 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI 0058 AIWA 0218 DENON 0188 HITACHI 0198 JVC 0088, 0178 KENWOOD 0148 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0228 MAGNAVOX 0128 MITSUBISHI 0138 ONKYO 0068, 0128 PANASONIC 0028 PHILIPS 0098, 0128 PIONEER 0108, 0118 PROSCAN 0158 RCA 0158 SAMSUNG 0078 SHARP 0038 SONY 0018 TECHNICS 0028 THOMSON 0168 TOSHIBA 0048, 0128 YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098, 0208 ZENITH 0128 LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 IV 0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 5 03.1.16, 2:03 PM THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895, 1815 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 CD RECORDER/CD-RW HITACHI JVC MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER KENWOOD PIONEER SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0214 0254 0264 0224 0024, 0224, 0234, 0344 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 V 0111RX-V540_code-GB.p65 6 03.1.16, 2:03 PM GB RX-V540RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100RX-V540_cv_GB.p65 1 RX-V540RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia WA72760 1/20/03, 3:12 PM